Dell C1765Nfw Mfp Laser Printer Users Manual User's Guide

2014-11-13

: Dell Dell-C1765Nfw-Mfp-Laser-Printer-Users-Manual-113590 dell-c1765nfw-mfp-laser-printer-users-manual-113590 dell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 376

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw
Color Multifunction Printer

User's Guide

Regulatory Model: Dell C1765nf / Dell C1765nfw

Contents
Before Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
A Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1

Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Conventions .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Finding Information

3
4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Product Features

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front View

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear View .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Space Requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing the Printer
Ordering Supplies

Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5

Removing Packaging Material .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Your Printer .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

Direct Connection

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ethernet Connection .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting the Telephone Line .

Setting Up Your Printer .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc .

Setting the IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47
47
51

Assigning an IP Address

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Tool Box .

Verifying the IP Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The System Settings Report .
The Ping Command

. . . .

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting

Turning On the Printer.

Loading Paper .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows ®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer
Direct Connection Setup

For installing host-based printer driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Connection Setup .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Printer Setup on a Local Network .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network .

Contents

. . . . . . . . . .

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

68
72

Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding Roles of Print Services
WSD Printer Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up for Shared Printing .
Point and Print .
Peer-to-Peer .

11 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
Installing the Drivers and Software

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s) .

Using Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
12 Operator Panel .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Operator Panel Buttons

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

91
91

Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer
only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Keypad Letters and Numbers .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing Numbers or Names .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters .

Inserting a Pause

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a Panel Settings Page .
Changing the Language
The Operator Panel
The Tool Box .

Setting the Power Saving Timer Option

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool .
Overview

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
Setting Up From Web Browser

97
97

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting Up From Operator Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

99
99

Overview of the Menu Items
Page Display Format

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101

Top Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101

Left Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

102

Right Frame

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

104
104

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

106

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

107

Details of the Menu Items .
Printer Status
Printer Jobs

Printer Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Server Settings .
Print Volume

108

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

122

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

133

Address Book

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

133

Tray Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

138

14 Understanding the Tool Box Menus .
Starting the Tool Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings
Printer Settings Report

139
139

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

142

Menu Settings
Reports .

139

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Information .

TCP/IP Settings
Tray Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143

Defaults Settings .
Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

144

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145

Printer Maintenance

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146

System Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148

Date & Time

Paper Density

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjust Transfer Roller
Adjust Fusing Unit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149
149

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

150

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151

Adjust Altitude .
Reset Defaults

Non-Dell Toner .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transfer Roller Refresh Mode .

151

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

152

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153

Web Link Customization
TCP/IP Settings
Tray Settings .

148

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Registration Adjustment .

Contents

103

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items

EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool) .

. . .

154

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

154

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

156

Scan Defaults
Fax Defaults

Copy Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

159

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

Fax Settings
Diagnosis .

Chart Print .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environment Sensor Info

161

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

Refresh Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

Resetting Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

162

Clean Developer .

15 Understanding the Printer Menus
Defaults Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163
163

Copy Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163

Scan Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

168

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

172

Fax Defaults

Print from USB Defaults .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

173

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

173

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

173

Tray Settings
MPF

Report / List .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

174

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

System Settings .
Panel Settings .
Job History

Error History .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Color Test Page

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Protocol Monitor

175
175

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

176

Phone Book
Network

175

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel

Admin Menu

175

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Address Book
Fax Activity

174

Fax Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System Settings .
Maintenance

181

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

188

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192

Secure Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

197

Scan to E-Mail .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

198

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

199

USB Settings

Contents

Panel Language .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Panel Lock Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

200

Disabling the Panel Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

200

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

201

16 Print Media Guidelines .
Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203
203

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

203

Recommended Paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

204

Unacceptable Paper .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

204

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

204

Paper Characteristics

Selecting Paper

Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205

Printing on Letterhead .
Loading Letterhead

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

206

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

206

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207

Envelopes
Labels

Storing Print Media .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208

Supported Paper Sizes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208

Supported Paper Types

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

209

Identifying Print Media and Specifications

Paper Type Specifications .

17 Loading Print Media
Capacity .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Print Media Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Letterhead

211
211
211
211
216

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

218

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

219

. . . . . . . . . . .

221

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223

Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
Loading Letterhead

209

. . . . . . . . . . .

Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

224

When Using the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

224

When Using the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

225

Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing

Contents

200

Enabling the Panel Lock .

Resetting Defaults

199

Using the Output Tray Extension .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

226

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing . . . . . . . . . . 227
18 Printing .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for Successful Printing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229
229

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

Sending a Job to Print

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

229

Canceling a Print Job.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

230

Tips on Storing Print Media
Avoiding Paper Jams

Canceling From the Operator Panel .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows

. . . . . . . . . . .

230

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231

Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device
Supported File Formats

Printing a File in a USB Memory
Printing a Report Page

19 Copying .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

231

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper for Copying .
Preparing a Document

233

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

233

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

235

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

236

Making Copies From the Document Glass .
Making Copies From the ADF
Setting Copy Options .
Number of Copies
Color .

230

Collated

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

236

Reduce/Enlarge

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

237

Document Size.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238

Original Type .

Lighter/Darker .
Sharpness .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

239

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

239

Auto Exposure .
Multiple-Up

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

240

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

240

Margin Top/Bottom

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

241

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

241

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

242

Margin Left/Right
Margin Middle .

Contents

Changing the Default Settings

20 Scanning .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning Overview .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

247

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

247

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

247

Printer Setup for Scan to WSD

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver .

248

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

249

Confirming a Login name and Password

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifying a Destination to Store the Document
Configuring the Printer Settings .

Scanning to USB Storage Device.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

252
259

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

263

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

264

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

265

Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image .
Setting an E-Mail Address Book .

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned File .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Configuring Fax Initial Settings.

266

267

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

Setting Your Country .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

Setting the Printer ID

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267

Setting the Time and Date .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

Changing the Clock Mode .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

Setting Sounds

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

268

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

269

Speaker Volume
Ringer Volume

Specifying the Fax Settings .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

269

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

272

Available Fax Settings Options
Sending a Fax .

269

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the Fax Settings Options

Loading an Original Document on the ADF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass.

Contents

251

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sending the Scanned File on the Network

247

. . . . . . . . .

Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP

21 Faxing

245
246

Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD .

Overview .

245

. . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to Application .

Procedures for WSD Scan.

243

. . . . . . . . . . .

272
272

Resolution

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Original Type .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lighter/Darker .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sending a Fax Automatically
Sending a Fax Manually .

274
274

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

275

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276

Automatic Redialing .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
Example

273

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Confirming Transmissions .

Sending a Delayed Fax .

273

Receiving a Fax .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

About Receiving Modes .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280
280
280
280
280

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
280
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode

. . . . . . . . . . .

280

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281

Automatic Dialing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

282

Speed Dialing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

282

Receiving Faxes in the Memory .
Polling Receive

Storing a Number for Speed Dialing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

282

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

282

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

283

Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial
Group Dialing

Setting Group Dial .
Editing Group Dial

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

283

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

283

Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission) .

. . . . .

284

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

284

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

Printing an Address Book List .
Other Ways to Fax

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

287

Using the Secure Receiving Mode
Using an Answering Machine .
Using a Computer Modem.
Printing a Report

Changing Fax Defaults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

287

Know Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
22 Understanding Your Printer Software
(Windows ® Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

291

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Printer Status Window .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

291

Status Monitor Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

291

Dell Supplies Management System .
Quick Launch Utility

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

291

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

292

Address Book Editor .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

293

ScanButton Manager

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

293

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294

Dell ScanCenter

23 Understanding Printer Messages
24 Specifications .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

295

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

301

Operating System Compatibility

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

301

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

301

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

301

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

301

Power Supply .
Dimensions
Memory

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface

301

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

302

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

302

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

303

MIB Compatibility .
Environment .
Cables .

Copy Specifications .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

304

Scanner Specifications .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

304

Facsimile Specifications

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

305

Maintaining Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
25 Maintaining Your Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Determining the Status of Supplies
Conserving Supplies

Contents

309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

309

Storing Print Media .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Storing Consumables .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Toner Cartridges

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

310
312

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

313

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

316

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

317

Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor .
Adjusting Color Registration .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

318

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

318

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

319

Printing the Color Registration Chart
Determining Values
Entering Values

Cleaning the Scanner.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller

26 Clearing Jams
Avoiding Jams

310

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing a Toner Cartridge

Performing Auto Adjust

310

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Removing the Toner Cartridges

Cleaning Inside the Printer .

309

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

322

323
323

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

324

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF

320

Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329

Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

330

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

332

Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
27 Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Printer Problems .

339

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

339

Display Problems .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

339

Printing Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

339

Print Quality Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The output is too light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents

341
341
342

Random spots/Blurred images
The entire output is blank

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

Streaks appear on the output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

344

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

344

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

344

Pitched color dots
Vertical blanks .
Mottle

Ghosting
Fog .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

345

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

346

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) .
Auger mark.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

346

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

347

Wrinkled/Stained paper

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The top margins is incorrect .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

348

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

349

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

350

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

350

Color registration is out of alignment
Protrudent / Bumpy paper .
Jam

347

Misfeed jam

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi-feed jam

350

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

351

Copy Problem

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

352

Fax Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

352

Scanning Problems .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Other Problems

353
355

. . . . . .

356

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

356

Contacting Service

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

356

Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
B Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Dell Technical Support Policy
Online Services

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

359

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

359

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360

Warranty and Return Policy
Recycling Information
Contacting Dell

New Zealand PTC200 Warnings
General warning .

Contents

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

2.11.1 Compliance testing (6) & (7) (Functional tests) .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

361

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

4.5.1 Off-hook line impedance .
4.9.3 Non-voice equipment

5.6.1 General requirements (automatic dialling devices) .
5.5.5 User instructions .

. . . . . . . . . .

361

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

8.1.7 User Instructions (automatic call set-up)
8.2.1(b) Call answering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

361

USA/Canada Wi-Fi Warnings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362

Labeling requirements

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362

RF exposure warning

Canada, Industry Canada (IC) Notices

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information
Canada, avis d'Industry Canada (IC)

362

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

363

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

363

Informations concernant l'exposition aux fréquences radio (RF)

. . . . . .

363

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

363

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

365

Canada IC statement

Index

362

Contents

Before Beginning
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings ..................................................... 17
1 Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's
Guide .................................................................................................. 19
2 Finding Information..................................................................... 21
3 Product Features......................................................................... 23
4 About the Printer......................................................................... 25

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your printer.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and
Internet Explorer are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Macintosh

and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries; Adobe is either a registered trademark or a trademark of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance; Wi-Fi Protected
Setup, WPA, and WPA2 are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions
upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This product
includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright © 2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved.
This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam
Leffler and Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little cms): Copyright © 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
April 2013 Rev. A01

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer
User's Guide

Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw
Color Multifunction Printer. For information on other documentation included with your Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw
Color Multifunction Printer, see "Finding Information" on page 21.
NOTE: In this manual, Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer is referred to as the "printer."

Conventions
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:
Bold texts

: • Names of hardware button on the operator panel.
• Screen names on the LCD panel.
• Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen.

Texts in Courier New font : • Menus and messages displayed on the LCD panel.
• Characters entered from the computer.
• Directory paths.
<

→
"

: • Key on the keyboard of the computer.
: • Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.

: • Cross references in this manual.
• Characters entered from the operator panel.
• Messages displayed on the computer screen.

Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer User's Guide

Finding Information

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
What are you looking for?

Find it here

• Drivers for my printer

Software and Documentation disc

• My User's Guide

The Software and Documentation disc contains setup video, documentation,
and drivers for your printer. You can use the disc to install/re-install drivers or
access your setup video and documentation.
Readme files may be included on your disc to provide last-minute updates about
technical changes to your printer or advanced technical reference material for
experienced users or technicians.
How to use my printer

Quick Reference Guide

• Safety information

Important Information

• Warranty information

WARNING: Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important Information
prior to setting up and operating your printer.

Finding Information

What are you looking for?

Find it here

How to set up my printer

Setup diagram

Troubleshooting

"Troubleshooting" on page 339

Express Service Code and Service Tag
Service Tag
xxxxxxx

Express Service Code
000 000 000 00

The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the side door of your
printer.
• Latest drivers for my printer

Go to support.dell.com

• Answers to technical service and support
questions

support.dell.com provides several online tools, including:

• Documentation for my printer

• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and
online courses
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as printer driver
• Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair
information
• Downloads — Drivers
• Manuals — Printer documentation and product specifications
Go to support.dell.com. Select your region and fill in the requested details to
access help tools and information.

Finding Information

Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.

Scanning to a USB Storage Device

Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper (Multiple-Up)

With Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer,
you don't need a PC to connect your USB storage device to save
the scanned data. Insert your USB storage device in the port on
the printer, and save the scanned data directly to your USB
storage device.
For more information, see "Scanning to USB Storage Device"
on page 264.

Multiple-Up Print allows you to print multiple pages on a single
sheet of paper. This feature allows you to reduce the paper
consumption.
For more information, see "Multiple-Up" on page 240.

2-Sided Printing (Manual Duplex Print)

Print From USB Memory (USB Direct Print)

Manual Duplex Print is to print two or more pages on the front
and back side of a single sheet of paper manually. This feature
allows you to reduce the paper consumption.
For more information, see "Loading Print Media When Manual
Duplex Printing" on page 224.

Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print directly
from your USB storage device without starting your computer.
Without requiring you to start your computer and an
application, this feature allows quick printing with simple
procedures.
For more information, see "Direct Print Using the USB Storage
Device" on page 231.

Product Features

Printing Through Wireless Connection (Wireless Print)
(Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

The Wireless LAN feature on your printer allows you to install
the printer at any location, and enables printing without a wired
connection to your computer.
For more information, see "Wireless Connection (Dell
C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on page 37.

Product Features

About the Printer
This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer.

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Front View
9

13 12 11 10

3 4 5

9 8

Operator Panel

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Document Feeder Tray

Document Output Tray

Toner Access Cover

Print Head Cleaning Rod

Power Switch

Front Cover

Paper Width Guides

MPF Extension

Length Guide

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Front USB Port

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

About the Printer

Rear View
13

11
10
9
8

2
3
4
5

ADF Cover

Ethernet Port

USB Port

Wall Jack Connector

Phone Connector

Power Connector

Rear Cover

Transfer Roller

Paper Chute

Paper Feed Roller

Transfer Belt

Levers

Security Slot

About the Printer

Space Requirements
Place the printer at a location such that there is adequate space for using the printer feeder and covers.
100 mm/3.94 inches

596 mm/23.46 inches

144.3 mm/5.68 inches

262.5 mm/10.33 inches

409 mm/16.10 inches
379 mm/14.92 inches

339 mm/13.35 inches

292.5 mm/11.52 inches

CAUTION: To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer, avoid placing the printer in direct sunlight with
the front cover opened.

About the Printer

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
1

ADF Cover

Document Guides

Document Glass

Document Feeder Tray

Operator Panel

For more information on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on page 91.

About the Printer

Securing the Printer
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.

Security slot

For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.

About the Printer

Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked printer. Enter the IP address of your
printer in your web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to
order toner for your printer.
You can also order toner cartridges by the following method:
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Dell Supplies
Management System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If ordering from the web:
a

Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.

Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
The Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color MPF - Dell Supplies Management System screen appears.

Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK.
The Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.
Dell supplies web site appears.
Service Tag
xxxxxxx

Express Service Code
000 000 000 00

If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section.

About the Printer

Printer Setup
5 Removing Packaging Material.................................................. 33
6 Connecting Your Printer ............................................................. 35
7 Setting Up Your Printer............................................................... 47
8 Setting the IP Address ............................................................... 53
9 Loading Paper.............................................................................. 57
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®
........................................................................................................ 65
11 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh
........................................................................................................ 85

Removing Packaging Material
This chapter provides an overview of your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer.

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
1 Remove the packaging material from the printer.

2 Lift and open the document cover.

3 Remove the protective sheet from the document glass.

Removing Packaging Material

Connecting Your Printer
Your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer interconnection cable must meet the following
requirements:
Connection type

Connection specifications

Wireless

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

USB

USB 2.0 compatible

Ethernet

10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible

Wall jack connector

RJ11

Phone connector

RJ11

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

1
2
3
4

Ethernet Port

USB Port

Wall Jack Connector

Phone Connector

Connecting Your Printer

Connecting Printer to Computer or Network
Direct Connection
A local printer is a printer which is directly attached to your computer using a USB cable. If your printer is attached
to a network, go to "Ethernet Connection" on page 36.
To connect the printer to a computer:
1 Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are turned off and unplugged from the power
source/outlet.
2 Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the printer.
USB port

3 Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of your computer.
CAUTION: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB port available on the keyboard.

Ethernet Connection
To connect the printer to a network:
1 Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have been turned off and all cables have been
disconnected.
2 Connect the Ethernet cable.
Ethernet port

NOTE: Connect the Ethernet cable, only if you need to setup a wired connection.

Connecting Your Printer

To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port at the rear of the
printer, and the other end to a LAN drop or hub.
To setup a wireless connection, see "Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on
page 37.

Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)
The specifications of wireless setting function are described below:
Item

Specification

Connectivity

Wireless

Connectivity Standard

IEEE 802.11b/802.11g compliant

Bandwidth

2.4 GHz

Data Transfer Rate

IEEE 802.11b mode: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
IEEE 802.11g mode: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps

Security

64 (40-bit key)/ 128 (104-bit key) WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)(IEEE
802.1x attestation function of WPA 1x non-corresponds), Mixed Mode PSK

Wi-Fi Protected Setup®(WPS)*1 Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal Identification Number (PIN)
*1

WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK AES, WPA2-PSK
AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)

You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi | WPS Button)*1
WPS-PBC (Operator Panel Menu)*1
WPS-PIN*2
Auto SSID Setup
Manual SSID Setup
*1

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless
configuration, by starting WPS-PBC on the printer with the
(Wi-Fi | WPS) button or operator panel menu, and then pressing the
button provided on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router. This setting is available only when the access point supports
WPS-PBC.

WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through access point, is available
only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS.

Connecting Your Printer

WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi | WPS Button)

You can start WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) by pressing the
button.

(Wi-Fi | WPS)

NOTE: WPS-PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PBC.
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC with the
(Wi-Fi | WPS) button, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may
vary) on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access
point (Registrar) or router, refer to the manual supplied with the product.
NOTE: For more information on the
(Wi-Fi | WPS) button, see "Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight (Dell C1765nfw Color
Multifunction Printer only)" on page 93.
If a problem occurs or error messages are displayed on the operator panel, see "Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color
Multifunction Printer only)" on page 356.
1 Press and hold the

(Wi-Fi | WPS) button on the printer for 2 seconds.

Ensure that the
(Wi-Fi | WPS) button starts to flash and Press WPS Button on WPS Router
appears on the operator panel.

2 Start the WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router within two minutes.
3 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Connecting Your Printer

WPS-PBC (Operator Panel Menu)

You can start WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PBC is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PBC.
NOTE: Before starting WPS-PBC, confirm the position of the WPS button (button name may vary) on the wireless LAN access
point (Registrar) or router. For information about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router, refer to
the manual supplied with the product.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System appears, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu appears, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Network appears, and then press the

5 Press the

button until WPS appears, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

6 Ensure that Push Button Control appears, and then press the
7 Ensure that Yes appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

Ensure that Press WPS Button on WPS Router is displayed, and start the WPS-PBC on the wireless LAN
access point (Registrar) or router within two minutes.
8 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Connecting Your Printer

WPS-PIN

The PIN code of WPS-PIN can only be configured from the operator panel.
NOTE: WPS-PIN is available only when the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router supports WPS-PIN.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System appears, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu appears, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Network appears, and then press the

5 Press the

button until WPS appears, and then press the

6 Ensure that PIN Code appears, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

7 Write down the displayed 8-digit PIN code or select Print PIN Code. The PIN code is printed.
8 Ensure that Start Configuration appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

9 Ensure that WPS AP Searching is displayed, and enter the PIN code displayed on step 7 into the wireless LAN
access point (Registrar) or router.
NOTE: For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) or router, refer to the manual supplied with the
product.

10 When the WPS operation is successful and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.
Auto SSID Setup

NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System appears, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu appears, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Network appears, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Wireless Setup appears, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

The printer automatically searches the access points on wireless network.
6 Press the

button until the desired access point appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

If the desired access point does not appear, go to "Manual SSID Setup" on page 41.
NOTE: Some hidden SSID may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected turn on SSID broadcast from the router.
7 Enter the passphrase or WEP key.
When the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA, WPA2 or Mixed in step 6:
•

Enter the passphrase, and then press the

(Set) button.

When the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 6:
•

Enter the WEP key, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 alphanumeric

characters. It may be described as a key on some access points or routers. For details, refer to the manual supplied with
the access point or router.

8 The Restart System screen appears and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Connecting Your Printer

Manual SSID Setup

NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System appears, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu appears, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Network appears, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Wireless Setup appears, and then press the

6 Press the

button until Manual Setup appears, and then press the

7 Enter the SSID, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

8 Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad-hoc depending on your environment, and then press
(Set) button.
the
If you select Infrastructure, proceed to step 9.
If you select Ad-hoc, proceed to step 10.
9 Select the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA2-PSK-AES, or
WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
•

Press the

button until No Security appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

To use Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:
a

Press the
press the

button until Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK-TKIP, or WPA2-PSK-AES appears, and then
(Set) button.

Enter the passphrase, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: A passphrase is an encryption key for WPA and WPA2 encryption which consists of 8 to 63 alphanumeric

characters. It may be described as a key on some access points or routers. For details, refer to the manual supplied with
the access point or router.

To use WEP encryption:
button until WEP appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

Press the

Enter the WEP key, and then press the

Press the
button to highlight the desired transmit key from WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4, and then press
(Set) button.
the

(Set)button.

Proceed to step 11.
10 Select the encryption type from No Security or WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
•

Ensure that No Security appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

To use WEP encryption:
button until WEP appears, and then press the

(Set) button.

Press the

Enter the WEP key, and then press the

Press the
button to highlight the desired transmit key from WEP Key 1 to WEP Key 4, and then press
(Set) button.
the

(Set) button.

11 The Restart System screen appears and the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection setting is completed.

Connecting Your Printer

Reconfiguring the Wireless Setting
To change the wireless setting through an Ethernet or wireless connection from your computer, perform the
following.
NOTE: To change the wireless setting through wireless connection, ensure that the wireless connection setting is completed in
"Wireless Connection (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on page 37.
NOTE: The following settings are available when the network mode is set to infrastructure in "Wireless Connection (Dell
C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer Only)" on page 37.
1 Check the IP address of the printer.
For details about how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings" on page 55.
2 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool by entering the IP address of the printer in your web browser.

3 Click Print Server Settings.
4 Click Print Server Settings tab.
5 Click Wireless LAN.
6 Change the wireless setting of the printer.
7 Reboot the printer.
8 Change the wireless settings on your computer or access point accordingly.
NOTE: To change the wireless settings on your computer, refer to the manuals provided with the wireless adapter or if
your computer provides a wireless adapter tool, change the wireless settings using that tool.

Connecting Your Printer

Connecting the Telephone Line
NOTE: Do not connect your printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you
will need to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the other end to an active wall jack.
Wall jack connector

To the wall jack

2 Remove the blue plug from the phone connector (

Blue plug

Phone connector

3 To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the telephone or answering machine line
cord into the phone connector ( ).

To an external telephone or
answering machine

Phone connector

Connecting Your Printer

If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy,
France and Switzerland), and you are supplied with a yellow terminator, insert the yellow terminator into the
phone connector ( ).

Yellow terminator

Phone connector

Turning On the Printer
WARNING: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
WARNING: The printer should not be connected to an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) system.
1 Connect the power cable to the power connector on the rear of your printer (see "Rear View" on page 26).

2 Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.

Connecting Your Printer

3 Turn on the printer.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions in the operator panel to configure the initial settings of your printer.

Connecting Your Printer

Setting Up Your Printer
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel

You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, and time when you turn on printer for the first time.
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on the operator panel. Follow
the steps below to set the initial settings.
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready appears on the operator panel in three minutes. After that, you
can set the following initial setup by enabling Power On Wizard on the operator panel or Dell™ Printer Configuration Web
Tool if needed.
NOTE: For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163.
NOTE: For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 97.
1 Ensure that Please Select Language appears, and then select the language you want to use on the
(set) button.
operator panel from the following drop-down list, and then press the

English
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Nederlands
Dansk
Norsk
Svenska
*1
*1

Dell C1765nf Color
Multifunction Printer
only

2 Press the

(set) button to start setting the country.

3 Ensure that Please Select Country appears. Select your country from the drop-down list, and then press
(set) button.
the
4 Ensure that Please Select Time Zone appears. Select the appropriate time zone from the following drop(set) button.
down list, and then press the

Setting Up Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Africa

(UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott
(UTC) Casablanca
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda
(UTC +01:00) Tunis
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek
(UTC +02:00) Cairo
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi

Americas

(UTC -10:00) Adak
(UTC -09:00) Alaska
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
(UTC -06:00) Central America
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk
(UTC -05:00) Havana
(UTC -04:30) Caracas
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba
(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus
(UTC -04:00) Thule
(UTC -03:30) St. John's
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires
(UTC -03:00) Greenland
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo
(UTC -02:00) Noronha

Setting Up Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Antarctica

(UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago
(UTC -03:00) Rothera
(UTC +03:00) Syowa
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok
(UTC +07:00) Davis
(UTC +08:00) Casey
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo

Asia

(UTC +02:00) Amman
(UTC +02:00) Beirut
(UTC +02:00) Damascus
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia
(UTC +02:00) Palestine
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh
(UTC +03:30) Tehran
(UTC +04:00) Baku
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan
(UTC +04:30) Kabul
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg
(UTC +05:00) Karachi
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
(UTC +08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk
(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore
(UTC +08:00) Taipei
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang
(UTC +09:00) Seoul
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok

Setting Up Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Asia

(UTC +11:00) Magadan

Atlantic Ocean

(UTC -04:00) Bermuda

(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka
(UTC -04:00) Stanley
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde
(UTC) Reykjavik
Australia

(UTC +08:00) Perth
(UTC +08:45) Eucla
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide
(UTC +09:30) Darwin
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island

Europe

(UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
(UTC +03:00) Moscow
(UTC +04:00) Samara

Indian Ocean

(UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives
(UTC +06:00) Chagos
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island

Setting Up Your Printer

Geographic Region

Time Zone

Pacific Ocean

(UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands
(UTC +09:00) Palau
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island
(UTC +12:00) Auckland
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands
(UTC +12:45) Chatham
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati

5 Ensure that Please Enter Date appears. Specify the current date, and then press the

(set) button.

6 Ensure that Please Enter Time appears. Specify the current time, and then press the

(set) button.

7 Press the

(set) button for Fax Setup.

If you want to skip the Fax Setup, press the

(Start) button and then restart the printer.

8 Ensure that Please Enter Fax Number appears. Enter your fax number, and then press the
button.
9 Ensure that Please Enter Name appears. Enter a name, and then press the
10 Press the

(set)

(set) button.

(set) button, and then restart the printer.

Printer Setup Using the Software and Documentation Disc
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer to start Dell Printer Setup.
2 Double-click the Dell C1765 Installer icon, and follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and
the printer.
NOTE: If the Software and Documentation disc does not automatically launch, try the following steps.
For Windows® XP, Windows Vista®, Windows 7, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server
2008 R2:
1 Click Start → All Programs (for Windows Vista and Windows 7) → Accessories (for Windows Vista and
Windows 7) → Run.
2 Type D:\setup.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click OK.
For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012:
1 Point to the bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search → Type Run in the search box, click Apps,
and then click Run.
2 Type D:\setup.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then click OK.

Setting Up Your Printer

Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address

An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can include up to
three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports both IPv4 and IPv6, select
Dual Stack.
CAUTION: Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator.
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. To open the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link local address. To check a link local address, see "Verifying the IP Settings" on
page 55.
NOTE: Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may be different. On Class A, for example, an IP
address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For assignment of IP addresses, contact
your system administrator.
You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the Tool Box.

The Operator Panel
For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on page 91.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
1 Turn on the printer.
Ensure that Ready appears on the operator panel.
2 Press the

(Menu) button.

3 Press the

button until System appears, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Admin Menu appears, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Network appears, and then press the

6 Press the

button until TCP/IP appears, and then press the

7 Press the

button until IPv4 appears, and then press the

(set) button.
(set) button.
(set) button.
(set) button.
(set) button.

8 Ensure that Get IP Address appears, and then press the

(set) button.

9 Press the

(set) button.

10 Press the
11 Press the

button until Panel appears, and then press the
button and ensure that Get IP Address appears.

button until IP Address appears, and then press the

(set) button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address.
12 Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.
13 Press the

button.

The next three digits are highlighted.
14 Repeat step 12 and step 13 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and then press the
15 Press the

(set) button.

button and ensure that IP Address appears.

Setting the IP Address

16 Press the

button until Subnet Mask appears, and then press the

(set) button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask.
17 Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.
18 Press the

button.

The next three digits are highlighted.
19 Repeat step 17 and step 18 to set subnet mask, and then press the

(set) button.

20 Press the

button and ensure that Subnet Mask appears.

21 Press the

button until Gateway Address appears, and then press the

(set) button.

The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address.
22 Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.
23 Press the

button.

The next three digits are highlighted.
24 Repeat step 22 and step 23 to set gateway address, and then press the

(set) button.

25 Turn off and turn on the printer.

The Tool Box
NOTE: When you use IPv6 Mode for network printing, the Tool Box cannot be used to assign an IP address.
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click the name of Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in
Printer Name, and then click OK.

The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.
4 Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address.
5 Press the Apply New Settings button to take effect.
The IP address is assigned to your printer. To verify the setting, open the web browser on any computer connected to
the network and enter the IP address into the address bar on the browser. If the IP address is set up correctly, the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool displays in your browser.
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer drivers with installer. When you use the
Network Installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to Auto IP on the operator panel menu, you can
set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window.

Setting the IP Address

Verifying the IP Settings
You can confirm the settings by using the operator panel, printing the printer settings report, or using the ping
command.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the
password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.

The Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System appears, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu appears, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Network appears, and then press the

5 Press the

button until TCP/IP appears, and then press the

6 Press the

button until IPv4 appears, and then press the

(set) button.
(set) button.
(set) button.
(set) button.
(set) button.

Check the IP address displayed on the operator panel.

The System Settings Report
1 Print the system settings report.
For details about how to print a system settings report, see "Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel" on
page 175.
2 Verify the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the system settings report under Wired
Network or Wireless Network.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address" on page 53.

The Ping Command
Ping the printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a network computer, type ping
followed by the new IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11):
ping 192.168.0.11
If the printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.

Setting the IP Address

Loading Paper

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the priority sheet inserter while a printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.
NOTE: For printing envelopes, see "Loading Print Media" on page 211.

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
1 Open the front cover by pulling out the instruction sheet.

2 Pull the PSI out.

Loading Paper

3 Remove the instruction sheet attached to the PSI with adhesive tape.

NOTE: Read the instruction sheet before you use the PSI.
4 Pull the length guide forward until it stops.

5 Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.

Loading Paper

6 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum.

7 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.

8 Load paper on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.

Loading Paper

9 Adjust the width guides and length guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.

10 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.

NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension backward until it stops, and then pinch the
length guide and slide it backward until it touches print media.

Loading Paper

11 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.

12 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper.
If a user-specified print media is loaded in the MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer
driver.

Loading Paper

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
1 Open the front cover.

2 Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.

3 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.

Loading Paper

4 Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.

5 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.

6 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper.
If a user-specified print media is loaded in the PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer
driver.

Loading Paper

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running
Windows®

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, check the IP address of your printer by performing one of the
procedures in "Verifying the IP Settings" on page 55.

Changing the firewall settings before installing your printer
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must change the firewall settings before installing the
Dell printer software:
•

Microsoft® Windows XP

•

Windows Vista®

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 8

•

Windows Server® 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 R2

•

Windows Server 2012
NOTE: For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or 3 must be installed.

The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example.
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
2 Click Start → Control Panel.
3 Select System and Security.
4 Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall.
5 Click Change settings → Allow another program.
6 Check Browse.
7 D:\setup.exe (where D is the drive letter of the optical drive) in the File name text box, and then click Open.
8 Click Add, and then click OK.

Direct Connection Setup
For installing host-based printer driver
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer to start Dell Printer Setup.
2 Click Install Printer Driver and Software.
3 Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable, and then turn on the
printer.
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds to the next page automatically.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

5 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears. If necessary, click Print Test Page to print
a test page.
Personal Installation

A personal printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server using a USB. If your printer is attached to
a network and not your computer, see "Network Connection Setup" on page 68.

For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver
NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com.
NOTE: The XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the check box displayed under the Printer name. Click Next.
Installation starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
12 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a local printer.
5 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
8 Click OK.
9 Select your printer name and click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box. Click Next.
Installation starts.
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network printer as an administrator.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired

action.

5 Click Add a local printer.
6 Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
7 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
8 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
9 Click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
Installation starts.
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
14 Click Finish.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

9 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.
10 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
11 Click Finish.

Network Connection Setup
Network Printer Setup on a Local Network
For installing host-based printer driver

1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer to start Dell Printer Setup.
2 Click Install Printer Driver and Software.
3 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select Local Installation, and then click Next.
5 Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the target printer is not displayed
on the list, click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually. You may specify
the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select I am setting up this printer on a server check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must enter a valid IP address.
NOTE: You can install the Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer, but the installation of using Windows Server 2008 is not
supported.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows Security Alert is displayed:
•

Windows Vista

•

Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 7 64-bit Edition

•

Windows 8

•

Windows 8 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2012

To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2
and Windows 7).
6 Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
a

Enter the printer name.

If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select Share this printer with other computers on
the network, and then enter a share name that users can identify.

If you want to set a printer as the default, select the Set this printer as default check box.

7 Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Install. You can specify folders in which
to install the Dell software and documentation. To change the folders, click Browse.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

8 Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Ready to Print! screen appears. If necessary, click Print Test Page to print
a test page.
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver

NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com.
NOTE: The XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device for Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click Next.
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
Installation starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the
desired action.

12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
13 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.
1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click
Next.
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click Continue.
8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
Installation starts.
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page.
14 Click Finish.
Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.
4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by name or TCP/IP screen appears where you can
find your printer using your printer name or TCP/IP.

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired

action.

6 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
7 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
8 Select your printer name and click Next.
9 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
10 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it.
11 Click Next.
Installation starts.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
3 Click Add a printer.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

4 Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
5 Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.
6 Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.
7 Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for Hostname or IP address, and then click
Next.
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired

action.

8 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
9 Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK.
10 Select your printer name and click Next.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
Installation starts.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
13 Click Finish.
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2012

1 Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
2 Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel.
3 Click Hardware and Sound (Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers → Add a printer.
4 Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.
5 Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.
6 Click OK.
7 Select your printer name and click Next.
8 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name box, and then click Next.
Installation starts.
9 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you share your printer, select Share this printer
so that others on your network can find and use it. Click Next.
10 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test page. To use this printer as the default
printer, select the Set as the default printer check box.
11 Click Finish.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving your
desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings, monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering
replacement consumables. You can click the Dell supplies link for ordering supplies.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the printer is directly connected to a computer or a print

server.

To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer's IP address in your web browser. The printer
configuration appears on the screen.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or
intervention.
To set up e-mail alerts:
1 Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
2 Click E-Mail Alert link.
3 Under E-Mail Server Settings, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, Reply Address, and your or key operator's e-mail
address in the e-mail list box.
4 Click Apply New Settings.
NOTE: Connection pending until printer sends an alert is displayed on the SMTP server until an error occurs.

Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network
Before Installation

Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.
Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7
64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit
Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2.
For Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start → All Programs (for Windows Vista only) → Accessories (for Windows Vista only) → Run.
2 Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration → Administrative Templates → Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Properties.
5 On the Setting tab, select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1 Click Start → All Programs (for Windows 7 only) → Accessories (for Windows 7 only) → Run.
2 Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK.
3 Click Computer Configuration → Administrative Templates → Printers.
4 Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select Edit.
5 Select Enabled, and then click OK.
6 Restart the computer.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

Share the Firewall File and Printer

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows
7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.
For Windows XP:
1 Click start → Control Panel.
2 Select Security Center.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.
For Windows Vista:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select Security.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 Click Change settings.
5 Click Continue.
6 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Double-click Windows Firewall.
3 Click Change settings.
4 On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and then click OK.
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select System and Security.
3 Click Windows Firewall.
4 Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall.
5 If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features: are dimmed, click Change settings.
6 Check the File and Printer Sharing check box. Home/Work (Private) or Public check box is automatically selected
according to your settings.
If File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears, click OK.
7 Click OK.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

Start Remote Registry

NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8,
and Windows 8 64-bit Edition.
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select System and Maintenance (System and Security for Windows 7).
3 Click Administrative Tools.
4 Double-click Services.
5 Click Continue (for Windows Vista only).
6 Right-click Remote Registry and select Start.
7 Right-click Remote Registry and select Properties.
8 Change Startup type: to Automatic, and then click OK.
Disable User Account Control

NOTE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to virus attacks.
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows
Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2.
For Windows Vista:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
5 Click Continue.
6 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.
7 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Turn User Account Control on or off.
4 Click Continue.
5 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.
6 Click OK.
7 Restart the computer.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes.
7 Restart the computer.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

For Windows 7:
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Change User Account Control Settings.
5 Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK.
6 Click Yes in User Account Control dialog box.
7 Restart the computer.
Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks

NOTE: This step is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition,
Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, and
Windows Server 2012 for the server computer.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2:
1 Click Start → Control Panel → Network and Internet → Network and Sharing Center → Change advanced
sharing settings.
2 To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other computers on the network to share the files
and folders on your computer, click Turn on network discovery.
3 Click Save changes.
4 If you see the User Account Control dialog box, click Yes.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition:
1 Click Start → Network.
2 Right-click Network and select Properties.
The Network an Sharing Center screen appears.
3 Click the down arrow button next to either Network discovery.
4 To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other computers on the network to share the files
and folders on your computer, click Turn on network discovery.
5 Click Apply.
6 If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
Disable Simple File Sharing

NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.
1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select Appearance and Themes.
3 Select Folder Options.
4 On the View tab, clear the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check box, and then click OK.
5 Click Start → Control Panel.
6 Select Performance and Maintenance.
7 Select Administrative Tools.
8 Double-click Local Security Policy.
9 Click Local Policies → Security Options.
10 Right-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts and select Properties.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

11 Ensure that Classic - local users authenticate as themselves is selected.
12 Click OK.
Installing the Printer Driver

NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic, Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista
x64 Home Basic, Windows Vista x64 Home Premium, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home Premium,
Windows 7 x64 Home Basic, and Windows 7 x64 Home Premium, Windows 8, Windows 8 x64, Windows 8 Pro, Windows 8 x64
Pro, and Windows Server 2012 is not supported.
1 Insert the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer in your computer. The Dell Printer Setup
file launches automatically.
2 Click Install Printer Driver and Software.
The Choose an installation type screen appears.
3 Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
4 Select Remote Installation, and then click Next.
5 Enter the Administrator user name and password of the client computer, then select the clients or servers, and then
click Next.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows Security Alert is displayed:
•

Windows Vista

•

Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 7 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

•

Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition

To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2
and Windows 7).
6 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in Select Printer, and then click Next.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in Select Printer, try the following steps:
•

Click Refresh to update the information.

•

Click Add Printer, and then enter a port name (any alphanumeric string of your choosing) and an existing IP address
for the printer.

7 Select the required items on Software and Documentation, and then click Install.
8 Click Finish to exit this tool.

Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the protocol of Microsoft for Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012.

Adding Roles of Print Services
When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need to add the roles of print services to the
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start → Administrative Tools → Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and
then click Next.
4 Click Next.
5 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
6 Click Install.
For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start → Administrative Tools → Server Manager.
2 Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3 Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next.
4 Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next.
5 Click Install.
For Windows Server 2012:

1 Click Server Manager of the Start screen.
2 Select Add Roles and Features from the Manage menu.
3 Click Next on the Before You Begin window → Select installation type on the Installation Type window → Select
destination server on the Server Selection window in the Add Roles and Features Wizard.
4 Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window, and then click Next.
5 Select features on the Features window → Confirm installation selections on the Confirmation window.
6 Click Install.

WSD Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using Windows Add Printer wizard. When installing using the
Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer, see "Network Connection Setup" on page 68 for
details.
NOTE: Installing WSD printer for Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012 is
available only with the Add Printer wizard.
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard

1 For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2:
Click Start → Devices and Printers (Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers for Windows
Server 2008 and Windows Vista).
For Windows 8, Windows Server 2012:
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound (Hardware
for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4 In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form of http://IP address/ws/.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address manually to create a WSD printer. To enter

the printer's IP address manually, follow the instructions below. For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD printer, you
must be a member of Administrators group.
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next.

NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of
the followings:
•

Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your computer.

•

Add the printer driver to your computer in advance.

5 Install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation,
type the password or provide confirmation.
6 Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
7 Print a test page to verify print installation.
a

For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2:
Click Start → Devices and Printers (Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers for
Windows Server 2008 and Windows Vista).
For Windows 8, Windows Server 2012:
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound
(Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Printer properties (Properties for Windows Server 2008
and Windows Vista).

On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Setting Up for Shared Printing
You can share your new printer on the network using the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your
printer, or using Windows Point and Print or peer-to-peer method. However, if you use either of the Microsoft
methods you will not get features such as the status monitor and other printer utilities, which will get installed with
the Software and Documentation disc.
If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its drivers on all the computers on the
network.
NOTE: You need to purchase the Ethernet cable separately for shared printing.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click Start → Printers and Faxes.
2 Right-click this printer icon and select Properties.
3 From the Sharing tab, check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
5 Click OK.
If the files are not present in your computer, then you will be prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

3 Click Change sharing options.
4 The "Windows needs your permission to continue" appears.
5 Click Continue.
6 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
7 Select Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
8 Click OK.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3 Click Change Sharing Options if exists.
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6 Click OK.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6 Click Apply, and then click OK.
For Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012

1 Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound (Hardware
for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.
2 Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties.
3 On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options if exists.
4 Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
5 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using this printer.
6 Click Apply, and then click OK.
To check that the printer is shared:
•

Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or Devices and Printers folder is shared. The
share icon is shown under the printer icon.

•

Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server and look for the shared name you
assigned to the printer.

Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients using the Point and Print method or the
peer-to-peer method.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

Point and Print
Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect to a remote printer. This feature
automatically downloads and installs the printer driver.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My Network Places.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.

Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new printer
object to be added to the Printers and Faxes folder. The time taken to copy varies based on the network traffic.
Close My Network Places.
4 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition) → Settings (for Windows XP
/ Windows XP 64-bit Edition) → Printers and Faxes.

Select the printer you have installed.

Click File → Properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start → Network.
2 Locate and double-click the host name of the server computer.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Click Continue in User Account Control dialog box.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object is added to the Printers
folder. The duration of this procedure may vary based on the network traffic.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound.

Select Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start → Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object will be added to the
Printers folder. The time taken for these activities varies based on network traffic.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start → Control Panel.

Select Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start → your user name → Network (Start → Network for Windows Server 2008 R2).
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object will be added to the
Printers folder. The time taken for these activities varies based on network traffic.
6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Click Start → Devices and Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

For Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012

1 Point to the bottom right corner of the screen, and then click Search → Type Network in the search box, click
Apps, and then click Network.
2 Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3 Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4 Click Install driver.
5 Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A new printer object will be added to the
Printers folder. The time taken for these activities varies based on network traffic.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

6 Print a test page to verify installation.
a

Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound
(Hardware for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.

Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties.

On the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is installed on each client computer. The client computers can
modify the drivers and handle the print jobs.
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

1 Click start (Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition) → Settings (for Windows XP /
Windows XP 64-bit Edition) Printers and Faxes.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Click Next.
4 Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next. If the printer is not
listed, type in the path of the printer in the text box.

For example:\\\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name
is the name assigned during the server installation process.
5 Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, specify the
location where the driver is available.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
If you want to verify installation, click Yes to print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a
shared printer by name text box and click Next.

For example:\\\

The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer
name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, specify the
location where the driver is available.
5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
6 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition

1 Click Start → Control Panel → Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed, select the printer
and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the Select a
shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network. The shared printer
name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, specify the
location where the driver is available.
5 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
6 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
7 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2

1 Click Start → Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or
select The printer that I want isn't listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer
in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name
is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to
specify the path to the available drivers.
5 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
7 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
8 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
For Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2012

1 Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound (Hardware
for Windows Server 2012) → Devices and Printers.
2 Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3 Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or
select The printer that I want isn't listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the printer
in the text box, and then click Next.
For example: \\\
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared printer name
is the name assigned during the server installation process.
4 If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available, you need to
specify the path to the available drivers.
5 Confirm the printer name, and then click Next.
6 Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then click Next.
7 If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page.
8 Click Finish.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows®

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running
Macintosh
Installing the Drivers and Software
1 Run the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer.
2 Double-click the Dell C1765 Installer icon.
3 Click Continue on the Introduction screen.
4 Confirm the installation location, and then click Continue.
5 Click Install to perform the standard installation.
6 Type the administrator's name and password, and then click Install Software.
7 Click Continue Installation.
8 Click Restart to finish installing the software.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)
When Using a USB connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8).
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default.
5 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using (Use for Mac OS X 10.8) are automatically entered.
6 Click Add.
When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8).
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default (Click the Plus (+) sign, and select the printer from Nearby Printers.
If there are no printers in Nearby Printers, select Add Other Printer or Scanner for Mac OS X 10.7 or select Add
Printer or Scanner for Mac OS X 10.8).
5 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using (Use for Mac OS X 10.8) are automatically entered.
6 Click Add.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3 Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax (Print & Scan for Mac OS X 10.7 and Mac OS X 10.8).
4 Click the Plus (+) sign, and click IP.
5 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
6 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
7 Select the model of your printer for Print Using (Use for Mac OS X 10.8).
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
8 Click Add.

Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11
When Using a USB Connection

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.
3 Start Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
7 Click Add.
When Using Bonjour

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3 Start the Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.
7 Click Add.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

When Using IP Printing

1 Turn on the printer.
2 Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the printer and the network.
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is configured properly on your Macintosh computer
and printer.
3 Start Printer Setup Utility.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.
4 Click Add.
5 Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box.
6 Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
7 Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
8 Select the model of your printer for Print Using.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.
9 Click Add.

Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh

Using Your Printer
12 Operator Panel ............................................................................ 91
13 Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool..................................... 97
14 Understanding the Tool Box Menus....................................... 139
15 Understanding the Printer Menus.......................................... 163
16 Print Media Guidelines............................................................. 203
17 Loading Print Media ................................................................. 211

Operator Panel

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Using the Operator Panel Buttons
The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD), light-emitting diodes (LED), control
buttons, and numeric keypad, which allow you to control the printer.

1 One Touch Dial button
•
2

Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book. The first four fax numbers in the Phone Book
are assigned to the buttons in row order, starting from the top corner.
(Copy) button

•
3

Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.
(Fax) button

•

Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.

4 Data LED
•

Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending Fax jobs.

5 Ready / Error LED
•

Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)

•

Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)

button
•

Moves a cursor or highlight right or left.
button

•
8

Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.
(Set) button

•
9

Confirms the entry of values.
(Contacts) button

•
10

Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services.
(Re-dial / Pause) button

•

Calls up the last telephone number the printer dialed.

•

Pauses a telephone number.

Operator Panel

(Cancel) button
•

Cancels the current processing or pending job.

12 B&W / Color LED
•

Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.

(Color Mode) button
•

Switches between color mode and black and white mode.
(Start) button

•
15

Starts the job.
(Backspace) button

•
16

Deletes characters and numbers.
(Speed Dial) button

•

Calls up a stored telephone number.

17 Numeric keypad
•

Enters characters and numbers.

18 AC (All Clear) button
•
19

Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.
(Back) button

•

Returns to the previous screen.

20 LCD Panel
•
21

Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
(Scan) button

•
22

Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.
(Menu) button

•
23

Moves to the top level of the Print From USB Memory, Job Status, and System menus.
(Wi-Fi | WPS) button (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

•

Starts Wi-Fi Protected Setup® (Push Button Configuration). Lights up when it is activated, and blinks in
certain conditions.

NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting. Make sure to press the
(Set) button to save the current entry or setting.

NOTE: For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter
Characters" on page 94.

Operator Panel

Status of Wi-Fi | WPS Button Backlight (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
This section describes when the backlight of the

(Wi-Fi | WPS) button lights up or blinks.

For more information, see "Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)" on page 356.
Wi-Fi | WPS Button
Backlight

Wi-Fi
Printer Status
settings*1

Error Message

N/A

Connected to the network via Ethernet
cable; Wi-Fi settings is not available
when an Ethernet cable is connected to
the printer.

Off

The printer enters Sleep/Deep Sleep mode -

Wireless link established

Blinking
normal

Searching for wireless LAN access point or router

Blinking
slowly

Searching/Connecting with WPS access
point or router during wireless operation

Blinking
fast

No wireless LAN access point or router
found within the specified time

Wireless Error
016-920 System Setup Fail

Off

WPS Connection failure; Security setting Wireless Error
of the wireless LAN access point or router 016-921 System Setup Fail
is WEP, which is unsupported on WPS.
*1 You can enable/disable the Wi-Fi settings. For more information, see "Wi-Fi (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)" on page 180.

Operator Panel

Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up your printer,
you enter your name or your company name and telephone number. When you store speed dial or group dial
numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.

•

When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.
–

Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O and finally 6.

–

To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.

–

Press the

(Set) button when you are finished.

Keypad Letters and Numbers
Key

Assigned numbers, letters or characters

@ : . / 1

a b c A B C 2

d e f D E F 3

g h iG H I 4

j k l J K L 5

m n o M N O 6

p q r s P Q R S 7

t u v T U V 8

w x y z W X Y Z 9

- _~

@ .

_ ! " # $ % & ' ~^ | ` ; : ? , (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { } < >

Changing Numbers or Names
If an incorrect name or number is entered, press the
Then enter the correct number or character.

(Backspace) button to delete the last digit or character.

Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause must be
entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display to indicate when a pause is
entered.

Operator Panel

Printing a Panel Settings Page
The panel settings page shows current settings for the printer menus. For details about how to print a panel settings
report, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163.

Changing the Language
To display a different language on the operator panel:

The Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Panel Language is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

4 Press the

button until the desired language is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

The Tool Box
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: For details about starting the Tool Box, see "Starting the Tool Box" on page 139.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page.
The System Settings page is displayed.
4 Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then click Apply New Settings.

Setting the Power Saving Timer Option
NOTE: NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In
this case, enter the password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
You can set the power saving timer for the printer. The printer waits before it restores the default copy settings, if you
do not start copying after changing them on the operator panel.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until System Settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Ensure that Power Saving Timer is highlighted, and then press the
6 Press the

button to select Sleep or Deep Sleep, and then press the

7 Press the
button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

You can select from 5–30 minutes for Sleep or 1–6 minutes for Deep Sleep.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Operator Panel

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Overview
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.
One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends an e-mail to
you or the key operator when the printer needs supplies or intervention.

To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all the printers in your area, use the Printer
Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the
network to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change the printer settings and keep track of
printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers on the
network using your web browser.

Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web browser before using the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the language differs from that of your web browser.

Setting Up From Web Browser
It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your web browser and the operator panel
before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

For Internet Explorer®

Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2 Select Languages in the General tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
For example:
•

Italian (Italy) [it-IT]

•

Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]

•

German (Germany) [de-DE]

•

French (France) [fr-FR]

•

English (United States) [en-us]

•

Danish [da-DK]

•

Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]

•

Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]

•

Swedish [sv-SE]

•

Chinese (Simplified, PRC) [zh-CN]

Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) settings in the Connections tab.
3 You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
•

Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.

•

Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of your printer in the Do not use proxy server for addresses
beginning with field under Exceptions.

After setting the language and proxy, enter (the IP address of your printer) in
the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For Firefox®

Setting Up the Display Language

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Choose in the Content tab.
3 Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in order of preference list.
For example:

•

English [en] or English/United States [en-us]

•

Italian [it]

•

Spanish [es]

•

German [de]

•

French [fr]

•

Dutch [nl]

•

Norwegian [no]

•

Swedish [sv]

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

•

Danish [da]

•

Chinese/China [zh-cn]

Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy

1 Select Options from the Tools menu.
2 Click Advanced tab.
3 Click Network on the Options dialog box.
4 Click Connection → Settings.
5 You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:
•

Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.

•

Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.

•

Select the Manual proxy configuration: check box, and then enter a hostname and a port number if you have
a list of one or more proxy servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the IP address of
your printer in the No Proxy for: edit box.

•

Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL: check box.

After setting the language and proxy, enter (the IP address of your printer) in
the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Setting Up From Operator Panel
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to Enable (the factory default) on
the operator panel. Check the operator panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
For more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163.

Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser.

If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the printer settings report or display the TCP/IP Settings
page, which lists the IP address. For details about how to find your printer's IP address, see "Verifying the IP Settings"
on page 55.

Overview of the Menu Items
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:
Printer Status

Use the Printer Status menu to get feedback on the printer status. When a toner cartridge is running low, click the
order supplies link on the first screen to order an additional toner cartridge.
Printer Jobs

Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Settings

Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settings and view the settings in the operator panel remotely.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Print Server Settings

Use the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for
communications.
Print Volume

Use the Print Volume option to check the number of pages printed for each paper size.
Address Book

Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, phone number, server address, and fax number
entries in the Address Book, or to register new entries.
Printer Information

Use the Printer Information menu to display the information of your printer.
Tray Settings

Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose
Feeder (MPF).
E-Mail Alert

Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs supplies or intervention. Enter your name or
the key operator name in the e-mail list box to be notified. Set E-Mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-mail
feature.
Set Password

Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that other users do
not inadvertently change the printer settings you selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help

Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site.
Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies

Contact Dell Support at:
support.dell.com

100

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections.

Top Frame
The top frame is located on the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated, the
current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.
The following items are displayed in the top frame.

Dell C1765nfw Color MFP

Displays the printer model name.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of your printer.

Location

Displays the location of the printer. The location can be changed in the Basic
Information on the Print Server Settings page.

Contact Person

Displays the administrator name of the printer. The name can be changed in the Basic
Information on the Print Server Settings page.

Printer Bitmap

Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu appears in the right
frame when you click the image.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

101

Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all pages. The menu titles displayed in the left frame are linked to
corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.

Printer Status

Links to the Printer Status menu.

Printer Jobs

Links to the Printer Jobs menu.

Printer Settings

Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.

Print Server Settings

Links to the Print Server Reports menu.

Print Volume

Links to the Print Volume menu

Address Book

Links to the Address Book menu.

Printer Information

Links to the Printer Status menu.

Tray Settings

Links to the Tray Settings menu.

E-Mail Alert

Links to the Print Server Settings menu.

Set Password

Links to the Security menu.

Online Help

Links to the Dell Support website.

Order Supplies at:

Links to the Dell web page.

Contact Dell Support at:

Links to the Dell support page web address: support.dell.com

102

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all pages. The contents of the right frame correspond to the menu that
you select in the left frame. For details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu Items" on
page 104.
Buttons in the Right Frame

Refresh button

Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information in the right
frame.

Apply New Settings button

Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to the printer.
The new settings replace the old settings of the printer.

Restore Settings button

Restores the old settings. New settings will not be submitted to the printer.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

103

Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. When you
access these menus, the authentication window appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password of the
administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the password in
the Set Password page in the Security menu. For more information, see "Set Password" on page 132.

Details of the Menu Items
"Printer Status"

"Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"

"Printer Jobs"

"Job List"
"Completed Jobs"

"Printer Settings"

"Printer Settings Report"

"Menu Settings"
"Reports"

"Printer Settings"

"System Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"

"Printer Maintenance"

"Paper Density"
"Adjust Transfer Roller"
"Adjust Fusing Unit"
"Auto Registration Adjustment"
"Color Registration Adjustment"
"Clean Developer"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Reset Defaults"
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"

104

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

"Print Server Settings"

"Print Server Reports"

"Print Server Setup Page"
"E-Mail Alert Setup Page"

"Print Server Settings"

"Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"Wireless LAN (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer
only)"*1
"TCP/IP"
"E-Mail Alert"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Scan to PC"
"Reset Print Server"

"Security"

"Set Password"
"IP Filter (IPv4)"

"Print Volume"
"Address Book"

"Print Volume"
"Fax/E-Mail"

"Address Book - Top Page"
"Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Address Book (Delete)"
"FAX Group - Top Page"
"FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"FAX Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Group - Top Page"
"E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"E-Mail Group (Delete)"
"E-Mail Default Setup"

"Server Address"

"Server Address - Top Page"
"Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)"
"Server Address (Delete)"

"Tray Settings"
*1 This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

105

Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the printer.
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:

To check the status of the consumables and trays.
Values:

Cyan Cartridge Level

Displays the percentage of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.
When a cartridge is empty, a message appears. The text Call or
Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies website.

Magenta Cartridge Level
Yellow Cartridge Level
Black Cartridge Level
Paper Trays

Output Tray

Status

Ready

Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is
unknown.

Add Paper

Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.

Capacity

Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.

Size

Displays the size of paper in the tray.

Status

Capacity
Cover

Indicates that the tray is available.
Displays the maximum capacity of the output tray.

Status

Closed

Indicates that the cover is closed.

Open

Indicates that the cover is open.

Printer Type

Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is displayed normally.

Printing Speed

Displays the printing speed.

Printer Events
Purpose:

When faults such as Out of Paper or Rear Cover is Open occur, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are
displayed in the Printer Events page.
Values:

Location

Displays the location where the error occurred.

Details

Displays the details of the error.

Printer Information
Purpose:

To display the system information of the printer. This page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in
the left frame.
Values:

Dell Service Tag Number

Displays Dell's service tag number.

Asset Tag Number

Displays the asset tag number of the printer.

106

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the printer.

Memory Capacity

Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed
Printer Revision Levels

Displays the processing speed.
Firmware Version

Displays the version of the controller.

Network Firmware Version

Displays the NIC version.

Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages show the
details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.
Job List
Purpose:

To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click Refresh to update the screen.
Values:

Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job being printed.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Job Status

Displays the status of the job being printed.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time

Displays the date when the print job was submitted.

Completed Jobs
Purpose:

To check the completed jobs. Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed. Click Refresh to update the screen.
Values:

Displays the job ID.

Job Name

Displays the file name of the job.

Owner

Displays the name of the job owner.

Host Name

Displays the name of the host computer.

Output Result

Displays the status of the job.

Job Type

Displays the type of the job.

Impression Number

Displays the total number of pages used by the print job.

No. of Sheets

Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job.

Host I/F

Displays the status of the host interface.

Job Submitted Time

Displays the date when the job was submitted.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

107

Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to configure the printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.
Printer Settings Report

The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Purpose:

To display the current settings of your printer.
Values:

System Settings

Power Saver Timer - Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
saver timer - sleep after it finishes a job.

Power Saver Timer - Deep
Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters the power
saver timer - deep sleep after it goes into the power saver timer
mode 1.

Auto Reset

Displays the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets
the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to the
defaults when no additional settings are made.

Panel Select Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Panel Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator
panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Job Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is
complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem
occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Out of Paper Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer
runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before
the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.

All Tones

Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates that all the
tones are disabled.

Job Time-Out

Displays the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive
from the computer.

Panel Language

Displays the language used on the operator panel.

Disable printing with larger Displays whether to disable printing if the paper size set in the
paper size
printer driver and the paper size set in the tray of the printer does
not match (the paper set in the tray is larger).

108

Auto Log Print

Displays whether to automatically print a job history report after
every 20 jobs.

mm/inch

Displays the measurement unit used after the numeric value on the
operator panel.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Secure Settings

Copy Defaults

Copy Color Balance

Copy Settings

Panel Lock Set

Displays whether to limit access to Admin Menu with a
password.

Software Download

Displays whether to enable download of firmware updates.

Copy Service Lock Set

Displays whether to enable the Copy service or to require a
password to use the service.

Scan Service Lock Set

Displays whether to enable the Scan service or to require a
password to use the service.

Fax Service Lock Set

Displays whether to enable the Fax service or to require a password
to use the service.

Print from USB

Displays whether to enable the USB-Print service or to require a
password to use the service.

Secure Receive Set

Displays whether to require a password to print incoming faxes.

Color

Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.

Reduce/Enlarge

Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Original Type

Displays the default document type.

Document Size

Displays the default document size.

Lighter/Darker

Displays the default copy density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to
enhance text on the copy.

Color Balance (Red)

Displays the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green)

Displays the color balance level of green.

Color Balance (Blue)

Displays the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance

Displays the gray balance level.

Multiple-Up

Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.

Collated

Displays whether to sort the copy job.

Margin Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

109

Scan Defaults

Fax Defaults

Fax Settings

110

Scan To Network

Displays whether to store scanned image on a network server or on
a computer.

File Format

Displays the file format to save the scanned image.

Color

Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Displays the default scan resolution.

Document Size

Displays the default document size.

Lighter/Darker

Displays the default scan density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to
enhance text on the scanned image.

Margin Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

TIFF File Format

Displays the selected TIFF file format; TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Compression

Displays the image compression level.

Max E-Mail Size

Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

Resolution

Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

Lighter/Darker

Displays the default density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Start

Displays the fax transmission start time.

Receive Mode

Displays the fax receiving mode.

Auto Receive Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after receiving an incoming call.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive Answer/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive
mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming
call.

Line Monitor

Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.

Ring Tone Volume

Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an
incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when
Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Displays the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Displays the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Displays the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts

Displays the number of redial attempts.

Redial Delay

Displays the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Remote Receive

Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code
on the external telephone.

Remote Receive Tone

Displays the remote receive code to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header

Displays whether to print the information of sender on the header
of faxes.

Fax Header Name

Displays the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Paper Density
Adjust Transfer Roller

Adjust Fusing Unit

Fax Number

Displays the fax number to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page

Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.

Sent Fax Forward

Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified
destination.

Fax Forward Number

Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming
faxes are to be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Number

Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto
dial number is started.

Discard Size

Displays whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax
page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper.

ECM

Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Modem Speed

Displays the fax modem speed.

Fax Activity

Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after
every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Fax Transmit

Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.

Country

Displays the country where the printer is used.

Plain

Displays the paper density of plain paper.

Label

Displays the paper density of labels.

Plain

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for thick plain
paper.

Covers

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for cover paper.

Label

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for labels.

Coated

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for coated paper.

Recycled

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for recycled paper.

Envelope

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for envelopes.

Plain

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for thick plain
paper.

Covers

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for cover paper.

Label

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for labels.

Coated

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for coated
paper.

Recycled

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for recycled
paper.

Envelope

Displays the temperature setting of the fusing unit for envelopes.

Auto Registration Adjustment

Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.

Adjust Altitude

Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

111

Non-Dell Toner
Clock Settings

Web Link Customization

Tray Settings

Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
Date Format

Displays the default date format.

Time Format

Displays the default time format; 24H or 12 Hour Clock.

Time Zone

Displays the default time zone.

Set Date

Displays the date setting.

Set Time

Displays the time setting.

Select Reorder URL

Displays a link used for ordering consumables, which can be
accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Regular

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.

Premier

Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that
can be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

MPF Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

MPF Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.

MPF Custom Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Custom Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Display Popup

Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts the user to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Reports
Purpose:

To print the settings and history information of your printer.
Values:

System Settings

Click Start to print the system settings page.

Panel Settings

Click Start to print the panel settings page.

Job History

Click Start to print the Job History report.

Error History

Click Start to print the Error History report.

Address Book

Click Start to print the Address Book report.

Color Test Page

Click Start to print the Color Test Page.

112

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Printer Settings

The Printer Settings tab contains the System Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy
Settings, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:

To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:
Power Saver Timer - Sleep*1 Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 1 after it
finishes a job.
Power Saver Timer - Deep
Sleep

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes
into the power saver timer mode 1.

Auto Reset

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or
Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional settings are made.

Panel Select Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is correct, or disables
the tone.

Panel Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel input is incorrect, or disables
the tone.

Job Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete, or disables the tone.

Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs, or disables the tone.

Out of Paper Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out of paper, or disables the
tone.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear, or
disables the tone.

All Tones

Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.

Job Time-Out

Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print
job is cancelled if it times out.

Panel Language

Used to set the language on the operator panel.

Disable printing with larger Specifies whether to print jobs if the paper set in the tray of the printer is larger than the paper
size set in the printer driver (the paper size does not have to match).
paper size*2
Auto Log Print
*3

mm/inch

Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.

*1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer - Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less
energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you
notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum
warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy
consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You
can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
*2 Disable printing with larger paper size is available only in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and the Tool Box.
*3 The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

113

Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Purpose:

To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the password.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.
Values:

Panel Lock Set

Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.

New Password

Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu.

Re-enter Password

Enter the new password again to confirm.

Software Download
Purpose:

To set whether to enable download of software updates.
Function Enabled
Purpose:

To enable the services to be password-enabled, and allow the user to change it.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to limit the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services. When you change the password for the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password.
Values:

Copy Service Lock Set

Allows you to set a password for the Copy Service feature.

Scan Service Lock Set

Allows you to set a password for the Scan Service feature.

Fax Service Lock Set

Allows you to set a password for the Fax Service feature.

Print from USB

Allows you to set a password for the USB-Print Service feature.

New Password

Sets a password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services.

Re-enter Password

Enter the new password again to confirm.

Secure Receive
Purpose:

Allows you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature is enabled, the printer
stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax. When changing the password for the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.
Values:

Secure Receive Set

Allows you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes.

New Password

Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes.

Re-enter Password

Enter the new password again to confirm.

114

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Copy Defaults
Purpose:

To create your own default copy settings.
Values:

Color

Selects mode for color or black and white copying.

Reduce/Enlarge

Sets the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Custom Reduce/Enlarge

Sets a custom reduction/enlargement ratio within the range of 25% to 400% when Reduce/Enlarge
is set to Custom.

Original Type

Sets the copy image quality.

Document Size

Sets the default document size.

Lighter/Darker

Sets the default copy density level.

Sharpness

Sets the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Copy Color Balance
Purpose:

To specify the default color balance level.
Values:

Color Balance (Red)

Sets the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green)

Sets the color balance level of green.

Color Balance (Blue)

Sets the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance

Sets the gray balance level.

Copy Settings
Purpose:

To configure the copy settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Multiple-Up

Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge.

Collated

Sets whether to sort the copy job.

Margin Top/Bottom

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Left/Right

Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Middle

Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

115

Scan Defaults
Purpose:

To create your own default scan settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Scan To Network

Computer
(Network)*

Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.

Server (FTP)

Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.

File Format

Sets the file format to save the scanned image.

Color

Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Sets the default scan resolution.

Document Size

Sets the default document size.

Lighter/Darker

Sets the default scan density level.

Sharpness

Sets the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Margin Top/Bottom

Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Left/Right

Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

Margin Middle

Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.

TIFF File Format

Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.

Image Compression

Sets the image compression level.

Max E-Mail Size

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes.
The default is 2048 K bytes.

Fax Defaults
Purpose:

To create your own default fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Resolution

Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is
enabled only if the remote machine also supports the super fine resolution.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

Lighter/Darker

Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Start

Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

116

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Fax Settings
Purpose:

To configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Receive Mode

Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.

Fax*

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the
time specified in Auto Receive Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal
speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Answer
Machine/
Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,
the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones.
If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as
Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland),
this mode is not supported.

DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone
company. After the telephone company has provided a separate number for
faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that
specific ring pattern.

Auto Receive Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming
call.

Auto Receive Tel/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.

Auto Receive Answer/Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor

Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.

Ring Tone Volume

Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through
the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Sets the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Sets the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts

Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you
enter 0, the printer will not redial.

Redial Delay

Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax
numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Remote Receive

Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Receive Tone

Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header

Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name

Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters
can be entered.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

117

Fax Number

Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page

Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a service provided by some
telephone companies.

Sent Fax Forward

Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Fax Forward Number

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Number

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is
started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size

Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not
fit onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it
onto the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.

ECM

Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the
ECM.

Modem Speed

Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Fax Activity

Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

Fax Transmit

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or
only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.

Country

Sets the country where the printer is used.

Printer Maintenance

The Printer Maintenance tab contains the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Roller, Adjust Fusing Unit, Auto
Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustment, Clean Developer, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, NonDell Toner, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Purpose:

To specify the paper density.
Values:

Plain

Sets the paper density of plain paper.

Label

Sets the paper density of labels.

118

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Adjust Transfer Roller
Purpose:

To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative
values. To increase the voltage, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:

Plain

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick plain paper within the range
of -3 to 3.

Covers

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Label

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled paper within the range
of -3 to 3.

Envelope

Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.

Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:

To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set
negative values. To increase the temperature, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to
decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:

Plain

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Plain Thick

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for thick plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Covers

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for cover paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Label

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for labels within the range of -3 to 3.

Coated

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for coated paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Recycled

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for recycled paper within the range of -3 to 3.

Envelope

Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.

Auto Registration Adjustment
Purpose:

To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

119

Color Registration Adjustment
Purpose:

To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to
a different location.
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.
Values:
Auto Correct

Click Start to automatically correct color registration.

Color Registration
Adjustment 1 (Lateral)

Specifies lateral (perpendicular to paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for Y
(Yellow), M (Magenta), C (Cyan) within the range of -5 to +5.

Color Registration
Adjustment 2 (Process)

Specifies process (paper feed direction) color adjustment values individually for LY (Left Yellow),
LM (Left Magenta), LC (Left Cyan), RY (Right Yellow), RM (Right Magenta), and RC (Right
Cyan) within the range of -5 to +5.

Clean Developer
Purpose:

To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge, to use up a toner cartridge when you need to
replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.
Values:

Clean Developer

Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge.

Yellow Toner Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

Magenta Toner Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.

Cyan Toner Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

Black Toner Refresh

Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.

Adjust Altitude
Purpose:

To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

0 meter*

Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters

120

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Reset Defaults
Purpose:

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) memory for system parameters, Address Book data for fax, or Address Book
data for e-mail. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to
their default values.
Values:

Reset Defaults and Restart
Printer

Click Start to initialize the system parameters.

Reset Defaults of User (Fax) Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.
Section
Reset Defaults of User
(Scan) Section

Click Start to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:

To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the
reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Clock Settings
Purpose:

To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Date Format*1

yy/mm/dd

Specifies the date format.

mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format

12 Hour Clock* Specifies the time format.
24H

Time Zone

Specifies the time zone.

Set Date

Specifies the current date.

Set Time

Specifies the current time.

The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

121

Web Link Customization
Purpose:

To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in the left frame.
Values:

Select Reorder URL

Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Regular

Displays the regular web address (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Premier

Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.

Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for
communications.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.
Print Server Reports

The Print Server Reports tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E-Mail Alert Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page
Purpose:

To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports. On
this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print
Server Settings tab.
Values:
Ethernet*1

Wireless

122

Ethernet Settings

Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate and the
duplex settings.

Current Ethernet Settings

Displays the current Ethernet settings.

MAC Address

Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the printer.

Wireless LAN

Displays whether to enable wireless connection.

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the network.

Network Type

Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure
mode.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer setting.

Link Channel

Displays the channel number of the connection.

Link Quality

Displays the quality of the connection.

Encryption

Displays the security method.

Transmit Key

Displays the transmit key.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

TCP/IP Settings

Host Name

Displays the host name.

IP Mode

Displays the IP mode.

IPv4

IPv6

DNS

IPv4

IP Address Mode

Displays the IP address mode.

IP Address

Displays the IP address.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Use Manual Address

Displays the manual IP address.

Manual Address

Displays the IP address.

Stateless Address 1-3

Displays the stateless addresses.

Link Local Address

Displays the link local address.

Manual Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Auto Configure Gateway
Address

Displays the gateway address.

Get DNS Server Address from
DHCP

Displays if the printer receives
the DNS server address
automatically from the DHCP
server.

Manual DNS Server Address

Displays the DNS server address.
Displays the DNS server address.

IPv6

Manual DNS Server Address

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Bonjour (mDNS)

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Port9100

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Port Number

Displays the port number.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Port Number

Displays the port number.

Simultaneous Connections

Displays the number of connections received simultaneously by the
client.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

Port Status

Displays the WSD (Web Services on Devices) port status.

Port Number

Displays the WSD port number.

Receive Time-Out

Displays the receive time-out period.

Notification Time-Out

Displays the notification time-out period.

Maximum Number of TTL

Displays the maximum number of TTLs.

Maximum Number of
Notification

Displays the maximum number of notifications.

SNMP

Port Status

Displays the port status.

FTP Client

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

FTP Passive

Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

Connection Time-Out

Displays the connection time-out period.

LPD

HTTP

WSD

SMB Client
*1

This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.

This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

123

E-Mail Alert Setup Page
Purpose:

To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail
feature and e-mail alert feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the
settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:

E-Mail Alert Setup Page

Port Status

Displays the port status.

Primary SMTP Gateway

Displays the primary SMTP gateway.

SMTP Port Number

Displays the SMTP port number.

E-Mail Send Authentication Displays the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.

E-Mail Alert Settings

124

POP3 Server Address

Displays the POP3 server address.

POP3 Port Number

Displays the POP3 port number.

Reply Address

Displays the reply e-mail address sent with each e-mail alert.

SMTP Server Connection

Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.

E-Mail List 1

Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature
specified in E-Mail List 1.

Select Alerts for List 1

Supplies Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for paper handling.

Service Call

Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for service calls.

E-Mail List 2

Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature
specified in E-Mail List 2.

Select Alerts for List 2

Supplies Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for paper handling.

Service Call

Displays the e-mail alert receive
status for service calls.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Print Server Settings

The Print Server Settings tab contains the Basic Information, Port Settings, Wireless LAN, TCP/IP, E-Mail Alert,
Bonjour (mDNS), SNMP, Scan To PC, and Reset Print Server pages.
Basic Information
Purpose:

To configure the basic information of the printer.
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed
Jobs page.
Values:

System Settings

EWS Settings

Printer Name

Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.

Location

Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.

Contact Person

Specifies the contact name, number, and other information of the
administrator and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.

Administrator E-Mail
Address

Specifies the contact address of the administrator and service
center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.

Asset Tag Number

Enter the asset tag number for the printer.

Auto Refresh

Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.

Auto Refresh Interval

Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status
display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

125

Port Settings
Purpose:

To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features.
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is rebooted. When you change or configure the
settings, click Apply new settings to apply the new settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:
Ethernet*1

Port Status

126

Ethernet Settings

Auto*

Detects Ethernet transmission
rate and the duplex settings
automatically.

10Base-T Half-Duplex

Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as
the default value.

10Base-T Full-Duplex

Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as
the default value.

100Base-TX Half-Duplex

Selects 100Base-TX Half-Duplex
as the default value.

100Base-TX Full-Duplex

Selects 100Base-TX Full-Duplex
as the default value.

Current Ethernet Settings

Displays the current settings of Ethernet.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the printer.

LPD

Specifies whether to enable LPD.

Port9100

Specifies whether to enable Port9100.

E-Mail Alert

Specifies whether to enable the E-Mail Alert feature.

SNMP

Specifies whether to enable the SNMP.

WSD

Specifies whether to enable the WSD port.

Bonjour (mDNS)

Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour (mDNS) feature.

Status Messager

Specifies whether to enable the Status Messager.

This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Wireless LAN (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Purpose:

To configure wireless network settings.
To connect the printer with a wireless network, be sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Values:

Wireless Settings

Security Settings

Wireless LAN

Specifies whether to enable wireless connection.

SSID

Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network using up to
32 alphanumeric characters.

Network Type

Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure.

MAC Address

Displays the MAC address of the wireless network setting of the
printer.

Link Channel

Displays the channel number of the wireless connection of the
printer.

Link Quality

Displays the quality of the wireless network connection of the
printer.

Encryption

Select the security method from the list.
No Security*

Specifies No Security to
configure the wireless setting
without specifying a security
method from WEP, WPA-PSK
TKIP/WPA2-PSK AES, and
Mixed Mode PSK.

WEP 64 Bit ASCII (5 Bytes)

Specifies the WEP 64 Bit ASCII
to use through the wireless
network.

WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13 Bytes) Specifies the WEP 128 Bit
ASCII to use through the
wireless network.
WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes)

Specifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex to
use through the wireless
network.

WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes)

Specifies the WEP 128 Bit Hex
to use through the wireless
network.

WPA-PSK TKIP*1

Specifies the WPA-PSK TKIP to
use through the wireless
network.

WPA2-PSK AES*1

Specifies the WPA2-PSK AES to
use through the wireless
network.

Mixed Mode PSK

Specifies the Mixed Mode PSK
to use through the wireless
network.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

127

WEP Key 1

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 1

Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm.

WEP Key 2

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 2

Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm.

WEP Key 3

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 3

Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm.

WEP Key 4

Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from Encryption.

Re-enter WEP Key 4

Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm.

Transmit Key

Specifies the transmit key type from the list.

Pass Phrase

Specifies the passphrase.

Re-enter Pass Phrase

Enter the passphrase again to confirm.

This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network Type.

TCP/IP
Purpose:

To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Values:

TCP/IP Settings

Host Name

Specifies the host name.

IP Mode

Specifies the IP mode.

IPv4

IP Address Mode

Selects the IP address mode.

Manual IP Address

Manually sets the IP address.

Manual Subnet Mask

Manually sets the subnet mask.

Manual Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway
address.

Use Manual Address

To set the IP address manually.

Manual Address

Manually sets the IP address. To
specify an IPv6 address, enter the
address followed by a slash (/)
and then "64". For details,
consult your system
administrator.

Stateless Address 1-3

Displays the stateless addresses.

Link Local Address

Displays the link local address.

Manual Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway
address.

Auto Configure Gateway
Address

Displays the gateway address.

IPv6

128

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

DNS

LPD

Port9100

HTTP

WSD

DNS Domain Name

Specifies the domain name of the domain name server. Up to 255
alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you
need to specify more than one domain name, separate them using a
comma or semicolon.

IPv4

Get DNS Server Address from
DHCP

Specifies whether to get the
DNS server address
automatically from the DHCP
server.

Manual DNS Server Address

Sets the DNS server address.

IPv6

Manual DNS Server Address

Sets the DNS server address.

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 1000 seconds.

IP Filter (IPv4)

Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied
access to the printer.

Port Number

Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period between 1 and 1000 seconds.

IP Filter (IPv4)

Specifies the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied
access to the printer.

Port Number

Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999.

Simultaneous Connections

Displays the maximum number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255 seconds.

Port Number

Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between 8000 and 9999.

Receive
Time-Out

Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65535 seconds.

Notification Delivery Time- Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Out
Maximum Number of TTL

Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.

Maximum Number of
Notification

Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.

E-Mail Alert
Purpose:

To configure settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Alert in the left frame.
Values:

E-Mail Server Settings

Primary SMTP Gateway

Sets the primary SMTP gateway.

SMTP Port Number

Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or between
5000 and 65535.

E-Mail Send Authentication Specifies the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
SMTP Login User

Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric characters,
periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them using commas.

SMTP Login Password

Specifies the SMTP account password using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.

Re-enter SMTP Login
Password

Enter the SMTP account password again to confirm.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

129

POP3 Server Address

Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name using up to 63 characters.

POP3 Port Number

Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or
between 5000 and 65535.

POP User Name

Specifies the POP3 account user name. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at symbols (@) can
be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them using
commas.

POP User Password

Specifies the POP3 account password using up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.

Re-enter POP User Password Enter the password again to confirm.

E-Mail Alert Settings

Reply Address

Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each e-mail alert.

SMTP Server Connection

Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.

E-Mail List 1

Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature using
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.

Select Alerts for List 1

Supplies Alerts

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for paper handling
and/or service calls.

E-Mail List 2

Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the e-mail alert feature using
up to 255 alphanumeric characters.

Select Alerts for List 2

Supplies Alerts

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for consumables.

Paper Handling Alerts

Specifies whether to receive an
e-mail alert for paper handling
and/or service calls.

Bonjour (mDNS)

Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings for Bonjour.
Values:

Host Name

Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The original setting will
remain valid if nothing is entered.

Printer Name

Specifies the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets.

130

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

SNMP
Purpose:

To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:

Community Name

Community Name
(Read only)

Specifies the community name to access (read only) data using up
to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered.
Characters entered for community name in the previous settings
will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read Community
is public.

Re-enter Community Name (Read Enter the community name to access (read only) data again to
only)
confirm.
Community Name (Read/Write)

Specifies the community name to access (read and write) data
using up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is entered.
Characters entered for community name in the previous settings
will not be displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write
Community is private.

Re-enter Community Name
(Read/Write)

Enter the community name to access (read and write) data again
to confirm.

Community Name (Trap)

Specifies the community name used for trap up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original settings will remain valid if nothing is entered.
Characters entered for community name in the previous settings
will not be displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community
is " " (NULL).

Re-enter Community Name (Trap) Enter the community name used for trap again to confirm.
Trap Notification 1-4

Trap Address Type

Select the trap address type from the list. Selecting Off clears the
settings in Trap Address, Port Number, and Notify, and does not
notify trap occurrence. Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 allows you to enter
Trap Address.

Trap Address

Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the following format:
• IPv4
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of "nnn" is a
variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. The IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.
• IPv6
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format.
Each section of "xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0
and ffff. The IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0
and 65535.

Trap Notification (IP) Port
Number

Enter the SNMP trap destination port number.

Notify

Specifies whether to notify trap occurrence.

Authenticate Error Trap

Specifies whether to notify Authenticate Error Trap.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

131

Scan to PC
Purpose:

To specify the client when scanning data.
Values:

FTP Client
SMB Client

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

FTP Passive

Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.

Connection Time-Out

Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60 seconds.

Reset Print Server
Purpose:

To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for the network feature and reboot the printer. You can also initialize the
NVM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:

Initialize NIC NVRAM
memory and restart printer.

Click Start to initialize NVM. Network settings will revert to the factory default settings and
reboot the network capability.

Restart Printer

Click Start to reboot the printer.

Security

The Security tab contains the Set Password and IP Filter (IPv4) pages.
Set Password
Purpose:

To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.
NOTE: If you forgot your password, initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) to restore the password to the default (NULL). See
"Reset Print Server" on page 132.
NOTE: When you change the password to lock the operator panel, set the password from Panel Lock Set in the Printer Settings.
Values:

Administrator Password

Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The password will appear as asterisks
(*) in the field when it is entered.

Re-enter Administrator
Password

Enter the password again to confirm.

132

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

IP Filter (IPv4)

Purpose:
To specify the IP address and subnet mask to be permitted or denied access to the printer.
Values:

Address

Specifies the IP addresses that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric value
between 0 and 255 in each field.

Address Mask

Specifies the subnet mask that are permitted or denied access to the printer. Enter a numeric
value between 0 and 255 in each field.

Active Mode

Permit

Permits printing from specified network address.

Reject

Rejects printing from specified network address.

Disable

Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.

Print Volume
Use the Print Volume menu to verify the number of printed pages.
Values:

Printer Page Count

Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was shipped from the factory.

Paper Used

Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.

Address Book
The Address Book menu contains the Fax/E-Mail and Server Address pages.
Fax/E-Mail

The Fax/E-Mail page contains the following subpages.
Address Book

Allows you to view, edit, or create address book entries.

Fax Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.

E-Mail Group

Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.

E-Mail Default Setup

Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and message.

Address Book - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the address book entries registered on the Address Book page.
Values:

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user IDs indicated on the button.

ID:Name

Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that user ID. IDs without an entry
show (Not in Use) in the Name column.

Phone Number

Displays the phone number of the user.

E-Mail Address

Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

133

Confirm/Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected user ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected user ID.

Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the address book entries on the Address Book page, or create a new entry. The following items are in
the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Address Book top page.
Values:

ID (Fax Speed Dial)

Displays the selected user ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the user ID, or enter a name for
the new entry.

Phone Number

Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user, or enter a phone number for the new
entry.

E-mail Address

Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an e-mail address for the new
entry.

Delete

Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID. This button is available only on the dialog
box for editing an existing entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Address Book (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the Address Book top page.
Values:

ID (Fax Speed Dial)

Displays the selected user ID.

Name

Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected user ID.

Phone Number

Displays the phone number of the user.

E-mail Address

Displays the e-mail address of the user.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

134

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

FAX Group - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the fax group entries registered on the Fax Group page.
Values:

GroupID:Name

Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in
the Name column.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm/Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the fax number group entries on the Fax Group page, or create a new entry. The following items are
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Fax Group top page.
Values:

Fax Group

FAX Speed Dial

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of
speed dial codes indicated on the button.

ID:Name

Displays a speed dial code and the names of an entry registered
under the speed dial code. Speed dial codes without an entry show
(Not in Use) in the Name column.

Phone Number

Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered
under the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the
new entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

FAX Group (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the fax number group entries registered on the Fax Group page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the Fax Group top page.
Values:

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

135

E-Mail Group - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
Values:

GroupID:Name

Displays a group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the
Name column.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.

Confirm/Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected group ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected group ID.

E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a new entry. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.
Values:

E-Mail Group

E-Mail Address

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.

ID:Name

Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that
user ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name
column.

Address

Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered
under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new
entry.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

E-Mail Group (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the E-mail Group top page.
Values:

Displays the selected group ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the group ID.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

136

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

E-Mail Default Setup
Purpose:

To set the default e-mail subject and message.
Values:

Default Subject

Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject. Up to 50 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Body Text

Allows you to enter the default e-mail message. Up to 200 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Server Address

Server Address - Top Page
Purpose:

To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Values:

Address List to:

Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs indicated on the button.

ID:Name

Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered under that server ID. IDs without
an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.

Server Address

Displays the address of the file directory.

Delete

Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.

Confirm/Change

Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected server ID.

Create

Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the selected server ID.

Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Purpose:

To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new entry. The following items are
in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm/Change or Create on the Server Address top page.
Values:

Displays the selected server ID.

Name

Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server ID, or enter a new server
name.

Server Type

FTP

Select this to store scanned documents on a server via the FTP protocol.

SMB

Select this to store scanned documents on a computer via the Server Message
Block (SMB) protocol.

Server Address

Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the server ID, or enter a new server
address.

Share Name

Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new shared name, when Server
Type is set to SMB.

Server Path

Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new path.

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

137

Server Port Number

Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a new port number. If you
leave the text box blank, the default port number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.

Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter
a new login name.

Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the selected protocol, or enter a
new password.

Re-enter Password

Enter the password again to confirm.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Server Address (Delete)
Purpose:

To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following items are in the dialog box
that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address top page.
Values:

Displays the selected server ID.

Name

Displays the name assigned for the server ID.

Server Address

Displays the server address registered under the server ID.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Back

Click this button to return to the top page.

Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Values:

MPF Paper Type

Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Paper Size

Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Custom Size - Y

Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

MPF Custom Size - X

Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Display Popup

Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Apply New Settings

Click this button to apply the new settings.

Restore Settings

Click this button to restore the previous settings.

138

Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

The Tool Box allows you to view or specify the system settings. You can also diagnose the system settings by using
the Tool Box.
The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance, and Diagnosis tabs.
NOTE: The Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings on Tool Box when Panel Lock is set on the
printer. In this case, enter the password you specified, and click OK to apply the settings.

Starting the Tool Box
Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case,
click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click
OK.
The Tool Box opens.

Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the Tool Box.
To select a new value as a setting:
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select the desired menu item.
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:
•

A phrase or word to describe a setting

•

A numerical value that can be changed

•

An On or Off setting

4 Select the desired value, and then click the associated button with each menu item.
Driver settings may have precedence over changes previously made and may require you to change the Tool Box
defaults.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

139

Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Printer Information, Menu Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray
Settings, Defaults Settings, and Fax Settings pages.

Printer Information
Purpose:
To display the information of your printer.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number

Displays the service tag number of your printer.

Express Service Code

Displays the express service code of the printer.

Printer Serial Number

Displays the serial number of the printer.

Printer Type

Displays the type of the printer.

Asset Tag Number

Displays the asset tag of the printer.

Memory Capacity

Displays the memory capacity.

Processor Speed

Displays the processing speed.

Firmware Version

Displays the version of the controller.

Network Firmware Version

Displays the Network Interface Card (NIC) version.

MCU Firmware Version

Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit (MCU) firmware.

Printing Speed (Color)

Displays the speed for color printing.

Printing Speed (Monochrome)

Displays the speed for monochrome printing.

Boot Code Version

Displays the boot code version.

Color Table Version

Displays the color table version.

Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of your printer.
Values:
System Settings

140

Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters
Sleep mode after it finishes a job.

Deep Sleep

Displays the time taken by the printer before it enters
Deep Sleep mode after it goes into Sleep mode.

Auto Reset

Displays the time taken by the printer before it
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on
the operator panel to the defaults when no additional
settings are made.

Panel Select Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
operator panel input is correct. Off indicates that the tone
is disabled.

Panel Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
operator panel input is incorrect. Off indicates that the
tone is disabled.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Job Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job
is complete. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when a
problem occurs. Off indicates that the tone is disabled.

Out of Paper Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted when the
printer runs out of paper. Off indicates that the tone is
disabled.

Auto Clear Alert Tone

Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds
before the printer performs auto clear. Off indicates that
the tone is disabled.

All Tones

Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off indicates
that all the tones are disabled.

Job Time-Out

Displays the amount of time that the printer waits for data
to arrive from the computer.

Fault Time-Out

Displays the time taken by the printer before it cancels
jobs that stop abnormally.

Panel Language

Displays the language used on the operator panel.

Auto Log Print

Displays whether to automatically print a job history
report after every 20 jobs.

Disable printing with larger paper size

Displays whether to disable printing if the paper size set in
the printer driver and the paper size set in the tray of the
printer does not match (the paper set in the tray is larger).

mm/inch

Displays the measurement unit used after the numeric
value on the operator panel.

Date Format

Displays the default date format.

Time Format

Displays the default time format; 24H or 12H.

Time Zone

Displays the default time zone.

Set Date

Displays the date setting.

Set Time

Displays the time setting.

Paper Density

Plain

Displays the paper density of plain paper.

Label

Displays the paper density of labels.

Adjust Transfer Roller

Plain

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for plain
paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for thick
plain paper.

Recycled

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for
recycled paper.

Covers

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for cover
paper.

Coated

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for coated
paper.

Envelope

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for
envelopes.

Label

Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller for labels.

Date & Time

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

141

Adjust Fusing Unit

Plain

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
plain paper.

Plain Thick

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
thick plain paper.

Recycled

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
recycled paper.

Covers

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
cover paper.

Coated

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
coated paper.

Envelope

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
envelopes.

Label

Displays the temperature setting of the Fusing Unit for
labels.

Auto Registration
Adjustment

Displays whether to automatically adjust color
registration.

Adjust Altitude

Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is
installed.

Non-Dell Toner

Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another
manufacturer.

Transfer Roller Refresh
Mode

Displays whether to execute counter measures for
curling/separating discharge of the paper.

Web Link
Customization

Select Reorder URL

Displays a link used for ordering consumables.

Regular

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx).

Premier

Displays the premier web address
(http://premier.dell.com).

Reports
Purpose:
To print the settings and history information of your printer.
The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings.
Values:

System Settings

Click to print a detailed list of the system settings.

Panel Settings

Click to print a detailed list of the panel settings.

Job History

Click to print the completed jobs history.

Error History

Click to print the error history.

Color Test Page

Click to print the Color Test Page.

Address Book List

Click to print the list of Personal Address, Fax Group, and E-mail Group stored as
Address Book.

142

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol.
Values:
IP Address Mode

Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.

IP Address

Displays the IP address of your printer.

Subnet Mask

Displays the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Displays the gateway address.

Tray Settings
Purpose:
To display the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Values:
Paper Type

Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.

Paper Size

Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.

Custom Size - Y

Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Custom Size - X

Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.

Display Popup

Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Type
and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

143

Defaults Settings
Purpose:
To display the default scan, fax, and copy settings of the printer.
Values:
Scan Defaults

Fax Defaults

Copy Defaults

144

Scan To Network

Displays whether to store scanned image on a network server or on a computer.

File Format

Displays the file format to save the scanned image.

Color

Displays whether to scan in color or in black and white.

Resolution

Displays the default scan resolution.

Document Size

Displays the default document size.

Lighter/Darker

Displays the default scan density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text
on the scanned image.

Margin Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

TIFF File Format

Displays the TIFF file format.

Image Compression

Displays the image compression level.

Max E-Mail Size

Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.

Resolution

Displays the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.

Document Type

Displays the type of document.

Lighter/Darker

Displays the default density level to be used for fax transmission.

Delayed Start

Displays the fax transmission start time.

Color

Displays whether to make copies in color or in black and white.

Reduce/Enlarge

Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.

Original Type

Displays the default document type.

Document Size

Displays the default document size.

Lighter/Darker

Displays the default copy density level.

Sharpness

Displays the default sharpness level.

Auto Exposure

Displays whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance text
on the copy.

Color Balance (Red)

Displays the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green)

Displays the color balance level of green.

Color Balance (Blue)

Displays the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance

Displays the gray balance level.

Multiple-Up

Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.

Collated

Displays whether to sort the copy job.

Margin Top/Bottom

Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Displays the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Displays the value of the middle margin.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To display the basic fax settings.
Values:
Receive Mode

Displays the fax receiving mode.

Auto Rec Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after
receiving an incoming call.

Auto Rec Fax/Tel

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external telephone receives an incoming call.

Auto Rec Ans/Fax

Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external answering machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor

Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.

Ring Tone Volume

Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Displays the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Displays the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Displays the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts

Displays the number of redial attempts.

Redial Delay

Displays the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Remote Receive

Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote receive code on the external
telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Displays the remote receive code to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header

Displays whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name

Displays the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Number

Displays the fax number to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page

Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting.

Sent Fax Fwd

Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Fax Fwd Number

Displays the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes are to be
forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials before any auto dial number is
started.

Discard Size

Displays whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the
entire page does not fit onto the output paper.

ECM

Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM).

Modem Speed

Displays the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Fax Activity

Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

145

Fax Transmit

Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only
when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Displays whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to
multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.

Fax Protocol

Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or
only when an error occurs.

Country

Displays the country where the printer is used.

Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the System Settings, Date & Time, Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Roller,
Adjust Fusing Unit, Registration Adjustment, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Transfer Roller
Refresh Mode, Web Link Customization, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, EWS, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults,
Copy Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.

System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the power saving mode, auto clear time, warning tones, time-out time, operator panel language
settings, job log auto print, and mm/inch setting.
Values:

Power Saver Timer

Auto Reset

Sleep*1

Available Range:
5– 30 minutes

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Sleep
mode after it finishes a job.

Deep Sleep

Available Range:
1–6 minutes

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Deep
Sleep mode after it goes into Sleep mode.

45 seconds

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically resets the settings for
Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no additional
settings are made.

1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
Alert Tone

Panel Select
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel
input is correct.

Medium
High
Panel Alert Tone Off
Low
Medium

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is
incorrect.
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel
input is incorrect.

High
Job Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete.

Medium
High

146

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Alert Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs.

Medium
High
Out of Paper
Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out
of paper.

Medium
High
Auto Clear Alert Off
Tone
Low
Medium

Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.
Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the
printer performs auto clear.

High
All Tones

Off

Disables all the alert tones.

Low

Specifies the volume of all the alert tones at once.

Medium
High
Job Time-Out

Disables the job time-out.

Available Range: Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the
5–300 seconds
computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Fault Time-Out

Disables the fault time-out.

Available Range: Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop abnormally.
3–300 seconds
The print job is cancelled if it times out.
Panel Language

English

Specifies the language to be used on the operator panel.

French
Italian
German
Spanish
Dutch
Danish
Norwegian
Swedish
Simplified
Chinese*2
Auto Log Print

Off

Does not automatically print a job history report.

Automatically prints a job history report after every 20 jobs.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

147

Disable printing with
larger paper size*3

mm/inch

Off

Prints even if the paper set in the tray of the printer is larger than the paper size set
in the printer driver (the paper size does not have to match).

Disables printing if the paper size set in the printer driver differs from the paper set
in the tray of the printer (the paper set in the tray is larger).

millimeter (mm) Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator
panel.
inch (")

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the Sleep mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warmup time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum
warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance between energy
consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the Sleep mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also
return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.

This item is available only for DellTM C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer.

Disable printing with larger paper size is available only in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool and the Tool Box.

Date & Time
Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:
Date Format

Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or dd/mm/yy.

Time Format

Specifies the time format; 12H or 24H.

Time Zone

Specifies the time zone.

Set Date

Specifies the current date.

Set Time

Specifies the current time.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain

Light

Label

Light

Specifies the paper density of plain paper.

Normal
Specifies the paper density of labels.

Normal
Apply New Settings

148

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Adjust Transfer Roller
Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative
values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Plain Thick

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Recycled

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Covers

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Coated

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Envelope

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Label

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Adjust Fusing Unit
Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set
negative values. To increase, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to
decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:

Plain

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Plain Thick

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Recycled

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Covers

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Coated

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

149

Envelope

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Label

Available Range:
-3 – +3

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
To set Color Registration Adjustment (individual yellow, magenta, cyan correction) settings. When Auto
Registration Adjustment is set to On, the printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration
by using the chart. Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the
printer is moved to a different location.
Values:
Auto Registration
Adjustment

Off

Automatically adjusts color registration.

Does not automatically adjust color registration.

Auto Correct

Click Start to automatically correct color registration.

Print Color Regi Chart*1,*2

Click Start to print a color registration chart.

Yellow
Color Registration
Adjustment 1 (Lateral)*1

Available Range:
-5–+5

Magenta

Available Range:
-5–+5

Cyan

Available Range:
-5–+5

LY(Left Yellow)
Color Registration
Adjustment 2 (Process)*1
LM(Left Magenta)

Available Range:
-5–+5

LC(Left Cyan)

Available Range:
-5–+5

RY(Right Yellow)

Available Range:
-5–+5

RM(Right Magenta)

Available Range:
-5–+5

RC(Right Cyan)

Available Range:
-5–+5

Apply New Settings

150

Available Range:
-5–+5

Specifies lateral (perpendicular to paper feed
direction) color adjustment values individually.

Specifies process (paper feed direction) color
adjustment values individually.

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the
changes.

This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.

The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that
are next to the line that is perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color registration is not needed. If
the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustment.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Values:
0 meter

Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000 meters
2000 meters
3000 meters
Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters or Address Book data. After executing this function
and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 162.
Values:

System Section

Click to initialize the system parameters.

User Fax Section

Click to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.

User Scan Section

Click to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the
reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Values:
Non-Dell Toner
Apply New Settings

Off

Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

151

Transfer Roller Refresh Mode
Purpose:
To execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Values:

Transfer Roller
Refresh Mode

Off

Does not automatically execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge
of the paper.

Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the
paper.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Web Link Customization
Purpose:
To specify a link used for ordering consumables.
Values:
Select Reorder URL

Select the Regular or Premier URL.

Regular

Displays the regular web address
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx).

Premier

Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com).

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

TCP/IP Settings
Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings.
Values:

IP Address Mode

AutoIP

Automatically sets the IP address.

BOOTP

Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.

RARP

Uses RARP to set the IP address.

DHCP

Uses DHCP to set the IP address.

Panel

Manually sets the IP address.

IP Address

Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.

Subnet Mask

Manually sets the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway address.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click Restart printer to apply new settings to apply the changes.

152

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Tray Settings
Purpose:
To specify the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
Values:
Paper Type

Plain

Specifies the type of paper loaded in the MPF.

Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain - Side 2
Plain Thick - Side 2
Covers - Side 2
Coated - Side 2
Recycled - Side 2
Paper Size

Specifies the size of paper loaded in the MPF.

A5
B5
Letter
Folio
Legal
Executive
Envelope #10
Monarch
Monarch Landscape
DL
DL Landscape
C5
Custom Size
Custom Size - Y

Available Range:
127–355 mm/
5.0–14.0 inch

Specifies the length of custom size paper.

Custom Size - X

Available Range:
77–215 mm/3.0–8.5
inch

Specifies the width of custom size paper.

Display Popup

Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Off

Does not display a popup menu.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

153

EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool)
Purpose:
To display the server settings of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, this setting cannot be displayed.
Values:
Print Server Settings
Display of EWS

Click Display to display the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
On

Turns on the display of the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.

Off

Turns off the display of the server settings for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click Restart printer to apply new settings to apply the changes.

Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:

Scan To Network

File Format

Color

Resolution

Document Size

154

Computer
(Network)

Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB)
protocol.

Server (FTP)

Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.

TIFF

Saves the scanned image in TIFF.

PDF

Saves the scanned image in PDF.

JPEG

Saves the scanned image in JPEG.

Black & White

Scans in black and white mode.

GrayScale

Scan in grayscale mode.

Color

Scans in color mode.

Color (Photo)

Scans in color mode. This is suitable for photographic images.

200

Scans an image at 200dpi.

300

Scans an image at 300dpi.

400

Scans an image at 400dpi.

600

Scans an image at 600dpi.

Sets the document size to A4.

Sets the document size to A5.

Sets the document size to B5.

Letter

Sets the document size to Letter.

Folio

Sets the document size to Folio.

Legal

Sets the document size to Legal.

Executive

Sets the document size to Executive.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Lighter/Darker

Lighter2

Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1

Sharpness

Normal

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1
Darker2

Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print or
faint pencil markings.

Softest

Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Softer
Normal

Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.

Sharper

Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Sharpest
Auto Exposure

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Off

Does not suppress the background.

Margin Top/Bottom Available Range:
0–50 mm/0.0–2.0
inch

Specifies the value of the top and bottom margins.

Margin Left/Right

Available Range:
0–50 mm/0.0–2.0
inch

Specifies the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Available Range:
0–50 mm/0.0–2.0
inch

Specifies the value of the middle margin.

TIFF File Format

TIFF V6

Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6.

TTN2

Sets the TIFF file format to TTN2.

Image Compression High

Sets the image compression level to High.

Medium

Sets the image compression level to Medium.

Low

Sets the image compression level to Low.

Max E-Mail Size

Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes
to 16384 K bytes.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

155

Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
Values:
Resolution

Standard

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is
enabled only if the remote machine also supports the Super Fine resolution.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

Document Type

Text

Improves the image quality of documents with text.

Photo

Improves the image quality of documents with photos.

Lighter/Darker

Lighter2

Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil
markings.

Darker2
Delayed Start

Available Range:
00:00–23:59

Apply New Settings

156

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.
After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Color
Reduce/Enlarge

Black & White

Prints in black and white mode.

Color

Prints in color mode.

mm series

200%
A5->A4 (141%)

Sets the default enlargement ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to millimeter.

A5->B5 (122%)
100%

Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied
image.

B5->A5 (81%)

Sets the default reduction ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to millimeter.

A4->A5 (70%)
50%

inch series

Custom

Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio to
the custom size.

200%

Sets the default enlargement ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to inch.

Statement->Legal (154%)
Statement->Letter (129%)
100%

Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a copied
image.

Legal->Letter (78%)

Sets the default reduction ratio when you set
the default measurement unit to inch.

Ledger->
Letter (64%)
50%
Custom

Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio to
the custom size.

Custom Reduce/Enlarge

Available Range:
25–400%

Reduces or enlarges the image to the custom
size when Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.

Original Type

Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Photo

Suitable for documents with both text and
photos/gray tones.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Sets the document size to A4.

Sets the document size to A5.

Sets the document size to B5.

Letter

Sets the document size to Letter.

Folio

Sets the document size to Folio.

Legal

Sets the document size to Legal.

Executive

Sets the document size to Executive.

Document Size

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

157

Lighter/Darker

Lighter2
Lighter1

Sharpness

Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works
well with dark print.

Normal

Works well with standard typed or printed
documents.

Darker1
Darker2

Makes the copy darker than the original. Works
well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Softest

Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softer
Normal

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than
the original.

Sharper

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharpest
Auto Exposure

Suppresses the background of the original to
enhance text on the copy.

Off

Does not suppress the background.

Color Balance (Red)

Available Range:
-2– 2

Sets the color balance level of red.

Color Balance (Green)

Available Range:
-2– 2

Sets the color balance level of green.

Color Balance (Blue)

Available Range:
-2– 2

Sets the color balance level of blue.

Gray Balance

Available Range:
-2– 2

Sets the gray balance level.

Multiple-Up

Off

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit
onto one sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper
in the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of
paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

Uncollated

Does not sort the copy job.

Collated

Sorts the copy job.

Auto

Automatically determines which output mode
for the copy job.

Margin Top/Bottom

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0
inch

Specifies the value of the top and bottom
margins.

Margin Left/Right

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0
inch

Specifies the value of the left and right margins.

Margin Middle

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0
inch

Specifies the value of the middle margin.

Collated

Apply New Settings

158

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

After you complete the settings, click Apply
New Settings to apply the changes.

Fax Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic fax settings.
Values:
Receive Mode

Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.

Fax

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the
time specified in Auto Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically receives a
fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker
indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Ans Machine/Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode,
the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If
the phone communication is using serial transmission in your country (such as
Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this
mode is not supported.

DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive
ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.
After the telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring
pattern.

Auto Rec Fax

Available Range:
0–255 seconds

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving
an incoming call.

Auto Rec Fax/Tel

Available Range:
0–255 seconds

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external telephone receives an incoming call.

Auto Rec Ans/Fax

Available Range:
0–255 seconds

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the
external answering machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor

Off

Turns off the volume of the line monitor.

Low

Specifies the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.

Medium
High
Ring Tone Volume

Off

Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low

Specifies the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to
Telephone/Fax.

Medium
High
Line Type
Tone/Pulse

PSTN

Sets the line type to PSTN.

PBX

Sets the line type to PBX.

Tone

Sets the dialing type to Tone.

Pulse (10PPS)
*1

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).

Pulse (20PPS)

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).

Resend Delay

Available Range:
3–255 seconds

Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts

Available Range:
0–9

Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number
is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

159

Redial Delay

Available Range:
1–15 minutes

Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Off

Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax
numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Off

Disables the remote receive feature.

Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after
picking up the handset of the telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Available Range:
00–99

Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header

Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Off

Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Remote Receive

Fax Header Name

Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30
alphanumeric characters can be entered.

Fax Number
Fax Cover Page
DRPD Pattern
Sent Fax Fwd

Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Off

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

Pattern1–7

Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.

Off

Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward

Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Print and Forward

Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination and prints all forwarded
incoming faxes.

Fax Fwd Number
Prefix Dial

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be
forwarded.
Off

Does not set a prefix dial number.

Sets a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Discard Size

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto
dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (PABX).
Off

Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.

Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.

Auto Reduction

Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.

ECM

Enables the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the
ECM.

Off

Disables the ECM.

Modem Speed

2.4

Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

4.8
9.6
14.4
33.6
Fax Activity

160

Auto Print

Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

No Auto Print

Does not automatically print a fax activity report.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Fax Transmit

Fax Broadcast

Fax Protocol

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple
destinations.

Print On Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations.

Print Disable

Does not print a protocol monitor report.

Print On Error

Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.

Print Always

Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.

Country

Selects the country where the printer is used.

Apply New Settings

After you complete the settings, click Apply New Settings to apply the changes.

Restart printer to apply new settings

Click Restart printer to apply new settings to apply the changes.

Pulse (20PPS) is available only in certain regions.

Diagnosis
The Diagnosis tab contains the Chart Print, Environment Sensor Info, Clean Developer, and Refresh Mode pages.

Chart Print
Purpose:
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosing your printer.
Values:
Pitch Configuration Chart

Click to print full halftone pages for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. Also outputs
pages to check the pitch.

Ghost Configuration Chart

Click to print a chart to check for ghost printing.

4 Colors Configuration Chart

Click to print bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black with varying density.

MQ Chart

Click to print charts to check for the binding.

Alignment Chart

Click to print a chart, and then check for proper alignment of the print image on
the paper.

Drum Refresh Configuration Chart

Click to print a chart to check the light fatigue of the drum unit.

Environment Sensor Info
Purpose:
To output the internal environment sensor information of the printer to Result by clicking Get Environment Sensor
Info.

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

161

Clean Developer
Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Values:
Clean Developer

Click Start to stir the toner.

Refresh Mode
Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner
cartridge.
NOTE: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.
Values:
Toner Refresh Mode Yellow

Click to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

Magenta

Click to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.

Cyan

Click to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

Black

Click to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the Select Printer window appears. In this case, click
Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click
OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reset Defaults page is displayed.
4 Select the desired option button.
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

162

Understanding the Tool Box Menus

Understanding the Printer Menus

When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of users, the access to the Admin Menu
menus can be limited. This prevents unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the
default menu settings that has been set by the administrator. However, you can use select settings for individual
print jobs using the printer driver. Print settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default
menu settings selected from the operator panel.

Defaults Settings
Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy, scan, and fax settings of the printer.

Copy Defaults
Use the Copy Defaults menus to configure a variety of copy features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Color

Purpose:
To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white.
Values:
Black & White

Prints in black and white mode.

Color*

Prints in color mode.

Collated

Purpose:
To sort the copy job.
Values:
Uncollated*

Does not sort the copy job.

Collated

Sorts the copy job.

Auto

Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job.

Understanding the Printer Menus

163

Reduce/Enlarge

Purpose:
To set the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.
Values:
mm series

200%
A5->A4(141%)
A5->B5(122%)
100%*
B5->A5(81%)
A4->A5(70%)
50%

inch series

200%
Stmt->Lgl(154%)
Stmt->Ltr(129%)
100%*
Lgl->Ltr (78%)
Ldgr->Ltr(64%)
50%

NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press
ratio or press to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or Manual.

164

Understanding the Printer Menus

to enlarge the zoom

Document Size

Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1

The default for

Document Size varies
depending on country-specific
factory default.

Original Type

Purpose:
To select the copy image quality.
Values:
Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Photo*

Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighter2

Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Understanding the Printer Menus

165

Sharpness

Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal*

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer

Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softest

Auto Exposure

Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
Values:
Off

Does not suppress the background.

On*

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.

Color Balance R

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of -2 to +2.
Color Balance G

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of -2 to +2.
Color Balance B

Purpose:
To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of -2 to +2.
Gray Balance

Purpose:
To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to +2.

166

Understanding the Printer Menus

Multiple-Up

Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:
4 mm*/0.2 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:
4 mm*/0.2 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Middle

Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:
0 mm*/0.0 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Understanding the Printer Menus

167

Scan Defaults
Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scanner features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Scan to Network

Purpose:
To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer.
Values:
Computer(Network)*

Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.

Server(FTP)

Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.

File Format

Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.
Values:
PDF*
TIFF
JPEG

Color

Purpose:
To set whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Values:

Black & White

Scans in black and white mode.

Color*

Scans in color mode.

Color Button Set

Purpose:
To assign color mode to the color mode switch button.
Values:

B&W Button
Color Button

168

Black & White*

Scans in black and white when Black & White is selected for a color mode.

Grayscale

Scans in gray scale when Black & White is selected for a color mode.

Color*

Scans in color when Color is selected for a color mode.

Color(Photo)

Scans in color (Photo) when Color is selected for a color mode. This is suitable
for photographic images.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Resolution

Purpose:
To specify the default scan resolution.
Values:
200 x 200dpi*
300 x 300dpi
400 x 400dpi
600 x 600dpi

Document Size

Purpose:
To specify the default document size.
Values:
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1

The default for

Document Size varies
depending on country-specific
factory default.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:
To set the default scan density level.
Values:
Lighter2

Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Understanding the Printer Menus

169

Sharpness

Purpose:
To set the default sharpness level.
Values:
Sharpest

Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal*

Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original.

Softer

Makes the scanned image softer than the original.

Softest

Auto Exposure

Purpose:
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.
Values:
Off

Does not suppress the background.

On*

Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image.

Margin Top/Bottom

Purpose:
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.
Values:

2 mm*/0.1 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

Margin Left/Right

Purpose:
To specify the value of the left and right margins.
Values:
2 mm*/0.1 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

170

Understanding the Printer Menus

Margin Middle

Purpose:
To specify the value of the middle margin.
Values:
0 mm*/0.0 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

TIFF File Format

Purpose:
To specify the default TIFF file format.
Values:
TIFF V6*

Sets the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6.

TTN2

Sets the default Tiff file format to TTN2.

Image Compression

Purpose:
To specify the image compression level.
Values:
High

Sets the image compression level to High.

Medium*

Sets the image compression level to Medium.

Low

Sets the image compression level to Low.

Max E-Mail Size

Purpose:
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default
is 2048 K bytes.

Understanding the Printer Menus

171

Fax Defaults
Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is not set up, a
message Set The Country Code appears on the display.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Resolution

Purpose:
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.
Values:
Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix
printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super Fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.
Original Type

Purpose:
To select the default document type.
Values:
Text*

Suitable for documents with text.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

Lighter/Darker

Purpose:
To set the default copy density level.
Values:
Lighter2

Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

172

Understanding the Printer Menus

Delayed Start

Purpose:
This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to start. Once Delayed Start mode is
activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time.
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
Values:
21:00*/PM9:00*

Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified time.

0:00 - 23:59 /
AM/PM1:00 - 12:59

NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.

Print from USB Defaults
Layout

Purpose:
To automatically enlarge print documents when you print directly from a USB storage device.
Values:
Auto*

Automatically enlarges print documents to fit on the paper.

Off

Does not enlarge print documents.

Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the MPF.
Values:
Paper Size

A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
Envelope #10 (4.1x9.5")
Monarch Env. (3.9x7.5")
Monarch Env. L (7.5x3.9")

Understanding the Printer Menus

173

DL Env. (110x220 mm)
DL Env. L (220x110 mm)
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)
Custom Size

Portrait(Y)

297mm*/11.7inch*
Available Range:
127-355 mm/5.0-14.0 inches

Landscape(X)

210mm*/8.3inch*
Available Range:
77-215 mm/3.0-8.5 inches

Paper Type

Specifies the length of the custom size
paper.
Specifies the width of the custom size
paper.

Plain*
Plain Thick
Covers
Coated
Label
Recycled
Envelope
Plain S2
Plain Thick S2
Covers S2
Coated S2
Recycled S2

Display Popup Off
On*
*1

The default for Paper

Does not display a popup menu.
Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set Paper Size and Paper Type
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.

Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.

NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 208.

Report / List
Use the Report / List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Report / List menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this
case, enter the password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.

System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the information such as the printer name, service tag, the status of the printer, consumables, and
the network settings.

Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.

174

Understanding the Printer Menus

Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.

Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.

Color Test Page
Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.

Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.

Address Book
Purpose:
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.

Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.

Printing a Report/List Using the Operator Panel
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Report / List is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until the desired report or list is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

The selected report or list is printed.

Printing a Report/List Using the Tool Box
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab.
3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.
The Reports page is displayed.
4 Click the button for the desired report or list.
The report or list is printed.

Understanding the Printer Menus

175

Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.

Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
Speed Dial

Purpose:
To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
See also:
"Storing a Number for Speed Dialing" on page 282.
Group Dial

Purpose:
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to 6 group dial codes can be
registered.
See also:
"Setting Group Dial" on page 283.

Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the wired or
wireless network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Ethernet

Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change takes effect after the printer is
turned off and then on.
Values:
Auto*

Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.

10BASE-T Half

Uses 10base-T half-duplex.

10BASE-T Full

Uses 10base-T full-duplex.

100BASE-TX Half

Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.

100BASE-TX Full

Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.

NOTE: For Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer, this item is not displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and
Wi-Fi is set to On.

176

Understanding the Printer Menus

Wireless Status (Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. No changes can be made on the operator panel to improve
the status of the wireless connection.
Values:
Connection

Good

Indicates good signal strength.

Acceptable

Indicates marginal signal strength.

Low

Indicates insufficient signal strength.

No Reception

Indicates that no signal is received.

SSID

Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.

Encryption Type

Displays the encryption type.

NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
Wireless Setup (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

Purpose:
To configure the wireless network interface.
Values:

Select Access

Manual Setup

Select the access point from the list.
WEP Key Entry

When you select an access point using WEP as the security method,
enter the WEP key. For 64bit keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can
be entered. For 128bit keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be
entered.

PassPhrase Entry

When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or Mixed as the
encryption type, enter the passphrase of 8 to 63 alphanumeric
characters.

Enter Network
(SSID)

Specify a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters can be entered.

Infrastructure

Select when you configure the wireless setting through the access point
such as a wireless router.
No Security*

Specify No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying
a security method from WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA2-PSK-AES.

Mixed mode PSK Select to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of
Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically selects the
encryption type from either WPA-PSK-TKIP, WPA-PSK-AES, or
WPA2-PSK-AES.
PassPhrase
Entry
WPA-PSK-TKIP

Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters
from 8 to 63.

Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of
WPA-PSK-TKIP.
PassPhrase
Entry

Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric characters
from 8 to 63.

Understanding the Printer Menus

177

WPA2-PSK-AES Select to configure the wireless setting with the security method of
WPA2-PSK-AES or WPA-PSK-AES.
PassPhrase
Entry
WEP

Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric characters
from 8 to 63.

Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit keys,
up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key

Ad-hoc

Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1*, WEP
Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.

Select to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as
a wireless router.
No Security*

Specify No Security to configure the wireless setting without specifying
the security method from WEP.

WEP

Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1*, WEP
Key 2, WEP Key 3, and WEP Key 4.

NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
WPS (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

Purpose:
To configure the wireless network using WPS.
Values:
Push Button Control

PIN Code

PBC Start*1

No*

Disables the security method of WPS-PBC.

Yes

Configures the wireless setting with the security method of
WPS-PBC.

Start Configuration

Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned
automatically by the printer.

Print PIN Code

Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when you enter the PIN code to
your computer.

You can also start WPS-PBC by pressing and holding the

(Wi-Fi | WPS) button.

NOTE: WPS 2.0 compliant. WPS 2.0 works on access points with the following encryption types: Mixed mode PSK, WPA-PSK
AES, WPA2-PSK AES, WPA-PSK TKIP, Open (No Security)
NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.

178

Understanding the Printer Menus

Reset Wireless (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless network
settings are reset to their default values.
No*

Does not reset the wireless setting.

Yes

Resets the wireless setting.

NOTE: This item is displayed when the Ethernet cable is disconnected and Wi-Fi is set to On.
TCP/IP

Purpose:
To configure TCP/IP settings. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
IP Mode
IPv4

Dual Stack*

Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.

IPv4 Mode

Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.

Get IP Address

AutoIP*

Automatically sets the IP address.

BOOTP

Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.

RARP

Uses RARP to set the IP address.

DHCP

Uses DHCP to set the IP address.

Panel

Enables the IP address entered on the operator panel.

IP Address

Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.

Subnet Mask

Manually sets the subnet mask.

Gateway Address

Manually sets the gateway address.

Protocol

Purpose:
To enable or disable each protocol. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:

LPD
Port9100
WSD
SNMP
E-Mail Alert

Disable

Disables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.

Enable*

Enables the LPD port.

Disable

Disables the Port9100 port.

Enable*

Enables the Port9100 port.

Disable

Disables the Web Services on Devices (WSD) port.

Enable*

Enables the WSD port.

Disable

Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) UDP port.

Enable*

Enables the SNMP UDP port.

Disable

Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.

Enable*

Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.

Understanding the Printer Menus

179

EWS
Bonjour(mDNS)

Disable

Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.

Enable*

Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in the printer.

Disable

Disables the Bonjour (mDNS).

Enable*

Enables the Bonjour (mDNS).

IP Filter

Purpose:
To block data received from certain IP addresses through the wired or wireless network. You can set up to five IP
addresses. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
No. n/Address
(n is 1-5.)

Sets the IP address for Filter n.

No. n/Mask
(n is 1-5.)

Sets the address mask for Filter n.

No. n/Mode
(n is 1-5.)

Reject

Rejects an access from the specified IP address.

Accepts an access from the specified IP address.

Off*

Disables the feature for Filter n.

NOTE: This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
Initialize NVM

Purpose:
To initialize network data stored in NVM (non-volatile memory). After executing this function and rebooting the
printer, all network settings are reset to their default values.
Values:
Yes

Initializes network data stored in NVM.

No*

Does not initialize network data stored in NVM.

Wi-Fi (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)

Purpose:
To enable the wireless connection.
Values:
Off

Disables the wireless connection.

On*

Enables the wireless connection.

NOTE: This item is displayed only when the Ethernet cable is disconnected.
NOTE: When you use the USB connection and do not use the wireless connection, you need to disable the wireless LAN.

180

Understanding the Printer Menus

Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Receive Mode

Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Values:
Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the
external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.

FAX*

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for the time specified in
Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is
not a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Ans Machine/Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this mode, the printer will
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is
using serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium,
Italy, France and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.

DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service
must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone company
has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup
to monitor for that specific ring pattern.

Auto Rec Fax

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call. The interval
can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.
Auto Rec TEL/FAX

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone receives an
incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.
Auto Rec Ans/FAX

Purpose:
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering machine receives
an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.

Understanding the Printer Menus

181

Line Monitor

Purpose:
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a
connection is made.
Values:

Off

Turns off the volume of the line monitor.

Low

Sets the volume of the line monitor.

Medium*
High

Ring Tone Volume

Purpose:
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal
speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Values:

Off

Turns off the volume of the ring tone.

Low

Sets the volume of the ring tone.

Medium
High*

Line Type

Purpose:
To select the line type.
Values:
PSTN*

Sets the line type to PSTN.

PBX

Sets the line type to PBX.

Tone/Pulse

Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Values:
Tone*

Sets the dialing type to Tone.

Pulse (10pps)
Pulse (20pps)
*1

182

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).
*1

Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).

Pulse(20pps) is available only in certain regions.

Understanding the Printer Menus

Resend Delay

Purpose:
To specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.
Redial Attempts

Purpose:
To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy, within the range of 0 to
9. If you enter 0, the printer will not redial. The default is 3.
Redial Delay

Purpose:
To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes. The default is 1 minute.
Junk Fax Setup

Purpose:
To reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone
Book.
Values:
Off*

Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.

NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.
Remote Receive

Purpose:
To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the
telephone.
Values:
Off*

Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Purpose:
To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Understanding the Printer Menus

183

Fax Header

Purpose:
To print the information of sender on the header of faxes.
Values:
Off

Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

On*

Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name

Purpose:
To set the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Fax Number

Purpose:
To set the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.
Fax Cover Page

Purpose:
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Values:
Off*

Does not attach a cover page to faxes.

Attaches a cover page to faxes.

184

Understanding the Printer Menus

DRPD Pattern

Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:
Pattern1-7

DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your
telephone company. The patterns provided with your printer are shown below:

Pattern1

Pattern2

Pattern3

Pattern4

Pattern5

Pattern6

Pattern7

Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is
the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400ms, stops for 800ms, rings for 400ms
and stops for 1400ms. This pattern is repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to
Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.

Forward Settings

Purpose:
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Values:
Off*

Does not forward incoming faxes.

Forward Only

Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Print and Forward

Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.

Understanding the Printer Menus

185

Fax Fwd Number

Purpose:
To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.
Prefix Dial

Purpose:
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.
Values:
Off*

Does not set a prefix dial number.

Sets a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Purpose:
To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful
for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Discard Size

Purpose:
To set whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the
output paper.
Values:
Off

Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.

Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.

Auto Reduction*

Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.

ECM

Purpose:
To set whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the ECM, the remote machines must also
support the ECM.
Values:
Off

Disable the ECM.

On*

Enables the ECM.

186

Understanding the Printer Menus

Modem Speed

Purpose:
To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
Values:
2.4 Kbps
4.8 Kbps
9.6 Kbps
14.4 Kbps
33.6 Kbps*

Fax Activity

Purpose:
To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Values:
Auto Print*

Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.

No Auto Print

Does not automatically print a fax activity report.

Fax Transmit

Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.
Values:
Print Always

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error*

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.

Fax Broadcast

Purpose:
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an
error occurs.
Values:

Print Always*

Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable

Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations.

Understanding the Printer Menus

187

Protocol Monitor

Purpose:
To set whether to print a protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of a communication problem.
Values:
Print Always

Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.

Print On Error

Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.

Print Disable*

Does not print a protocol monitor report after a fax transmission.

Country

Purpose:
To select the country where the printer is used.

System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Power Saving Timer

Purpose:
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.
Values:
Sleep

5min*
Available Range:
5–30min

Deep Sleep

6min*
Available Range:
1–6min

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Sleep mode after it finishes a
job.
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters Deep Sleep mode after it goes
into Sleep mode.

Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less
energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room
lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to operate
with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want
a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer mode when it receives data from
the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.

188

Understanding the Printer Menus

Auto Reset

Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the defaults and return to the standby mode after you
do not specify any settings for the specified time.
Values:
45sec*
1min
2min
3min
4min

Fault Time-Out

Purpose:
To specify the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it
times out.
Values:
Off
On*

Disables the fault time-out.
60sec*

Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels for jobs that stop abnormally.

Available Range:
3–300sec

Job Time-Out

Purpose:
To specify the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is cancelled
if it times out.
Values:
Off
On*

Disables the job time-out.
60sec*

Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer.

Available Range:
5–300sec

Understanding the Printer Menus

189

Date & Time

Purpose:
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.
Values:
Set Date

Specifies the current date.

Set Time
Date Format

Specifies the current time.
*1

yy/mm/dd

Specifies the date format.

mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format

12H*

Specifies the time format.

24H
Time Zone
*1

Specifies the time zone.

The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.

Alert Tone

Purpose:
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears.
Values:
Panel Select Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is correct.

Medium
High
Panel Alert Tone

Off*

Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is incorrect.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel input is incorrect.

Medium
High
Auto Clear Alert

Off*

Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds before the printer performs auto clear.

Medium
High
Job Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete.

Medium*
High
Alert Tone

Off

Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs.

Medium*
High

190

Understanding the Printer Menus

Out of Paper

Off

Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper.

Low

Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out of paper.

Medium*
High
All Tones

Off

Disables all the alert tones.

Low

Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.

Medium*
High

mm / inch

Purpose:
To specify the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
Values:

Millimeters (mm)

Specifies the default measurement unit.

Inches (")

NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.
Auto Log Print

Purpose:
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.
Values:

Off*

Does not automatically print a job history report.

Automatically prints a job history report.

NOTE: The job history report can also be printed using the Report List menu.
Low Toner Alert Msg

Purpose:
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.
Values:

Off

Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.

On*

Shows the alert message when the toner is low.

Understanding the Printer Menus

191

Power On Wizard

Purpose:
To perform initial setup for the printer.
Values:

Yes

Performs the initial setup for the printer.

No*

Does not perform the initial setup for the printer.

Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize NVM (non-volatile memory), configure the plain paper quality
adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
F/W Version

Purpose:
To display the version of the controller.
Service Tag

Purpose:
To display the service tag of the printer.
Express Code

Purpose:
To display the express service code of the printer.
Paper Density

Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain

Light
Normal*

Label

Light
Normal*

192

Understanding the Printer Menus

Adjust Transfer Roller

Purpose:
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller. To decrease the voltage, set negative
values. To increase the voltage, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you see mottles on the print output, try to
increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:
Plain

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Plain Thick

Covers

Available Range: -3 – +3
Available Range: -3 – +3
Coated

Label

Available Range: -3 – +3
Available Range: -3 – +3
Recycled

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Envelope

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Adjust Fusing Unit

Purpose:
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To decrease the temperature, set
negative values. To increase the temperature, set positive values.
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When the printed paper has curled, try to
decrease the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.
Values:

Plain

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Plain Thick

Covers

Available Range: -3 – +3
Available Range: -3 – +3
Coated

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Understanding the Printer Menus

193

Label

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Recycled

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Envelope

0*
Available Range: -3 – +3

Auto Regi Adjust

Purpose:
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.
Values:

Off

Does not automatically adjust color registration.

On*

Automatically adjusts color registration.

Adjust ColorRegi

Purpose:
To automatically adjust color registration.
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to
a different location.
NOTE: This item is available only when Auto Regi Adjust is set to Off.
Values:
Auto Adjust

Yes

Automatically adjusts color registration.

No*

Does not automatically adjust color registration.

Clean Developer

Purpose:
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.
Values:
Yes

Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.

No*

Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.

194

Understanding the Printer Menus

Toner Refresh

Purpose:
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to stir the toner in a new toner
cartridge.
Values:
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black

Yes

Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.

Yes

Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.

Yes

Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.

Yes

Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge.

No*

Does not clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.

Transfer Roller Refresh

Purpose:
Specify whether to execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.
Values:
Off*

Does not automatically execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.

Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.

Initialize NVM

Purpose:
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters, Address Book data for fax, or Address Book data for
e-mail. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default
values.
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 201.
Values:

User Fax Section
User Scan Section
System Section

Yes

Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.

No*

Does not initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.

Yes

Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

No*

Does not initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.

Yes

Initializes the system parameters.

No*

Does not initialize the system parameters.

Understanding the Printer Menus

195

Non-Dell Toner

Purpose:
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the
reliability of your printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart the printer.
Values:
Off*

Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.

Adjust Altitude

Purpose:
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure. Adjustments are
performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the printer is being used.
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of remaining toner.
Values:
0m*

Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.

1000m
2000m
3000m

196

Understanding the Printer Menus

Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from being
changed accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Panel Lock

Purpose:
To restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List.
For details see "Panel Lock Function" on page 200.
NOTE: You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Function Enabled are set to On and
Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.
Values:
Panel Lock Set
Change Password

Disable*

Does not restrict access to Admin Menu and Report / List.

Enable

Restricts access to Admin Menu and Report / List with a password.

Available Range:
0000–9999

Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Menu and
Report / List.

Function Enabled

Purpose:
To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a password to use the services, and to set or
change the password.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Function Enabled only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Values:
COPY

FAX

SCAN

USB-Print

On*

Enables the Copy service.

Off

Disables the Copy service.

On(Password)

Enables the Copy service, but requires a password.

On(Color Password)

Enables the Copy service with a color mode, but requires a password.

On*

Enables the Fax service.

Off

Disables the Fax service (the printer will not send or receive faxes).

On(Password)

Enables the Fax services, but requires a password to send faxes (does not require
a password to receive incoming faxes).

On*

Enables the Scan service.

Off

Disables the Scan service.

On(Password)

Enables the Scan service, but requires a password.

On*

Enables the USB-Print service.

Off

Disables the USB-Print service.

On(Password)

Enables the USB-Print service, but requires a password.

On(Color Password)
Change Password

Enables the USB-Print service with a color mode, but requires a password.
Sets or changes the password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and
USB-Print services.

Understanding the Printer Menus

197

Secure Receive

Purpose:
To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes, and to set or change the password. When Secure
Receive Set is set to Enable, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is
entered on the operator panel.
NOTE: You can access to the items under Secure Receive Set only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
Values:
Secure Receive Set Disable*
Change Password

Does not require a password to print incoming faxes.

Enable

Requires a password to print incoming faxes.

Available Range:
0000–9999

Sets or changes the password required to print incoming faxes.

Software Download

Purpose:
To enable or disable download of firmware updates.
Values:

Disable

Disables firmware updates.

Enable*

Enables firmware updates.

Scan to E-Mail
Use the Scan to E-Mail menu to edit the transmission source.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Edit From Field

Purpose:
To specify whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use Scan to E-mail.
Values:
Disable

Disables editing of the transmission source.

Enable*

Enables editing of the transmission source.

198

Understanding the Printer Menus

USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
USB port

Purpose:
To enable or disable the USB interface. The change takes effect after the printer is turned off and then on.
Values:
Enable*

Enables the USB interface.

Disable

Disables the USB interface.

Panel Language
Purpose:
To specify the language to be used on the operator panel.
Values:
English*
Français
Italiano
Deutsch
Español
Nederlands
Dansk
Norsk
Svenska
*1
*1

Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction
Printer only

Understanding the Printer Menus

199

Panel Lock Function
This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing settings made by the administrator. However, you can select
settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver.

Enabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

6 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the
7 Press the

(Set) button.

button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

NOTE: The factory-default panel password is 0000.
NOTE: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below allows you to reset the password, but the
settings for Address Book and Phone Book are cleared.
•

Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the

(Menu) button, turn on the printer.

NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the
button until
Change Password is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button. Enter the new password, and then press the
(Set) button. This will change the password.

Disabling the Panel Lock
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Enter the password, and then press the
5 Press the

button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the

button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the

Understanding the Printer Menus

(Set) button.

7 Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the

200

(Set) button.

6 Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the
8 Press the

(Set) button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to their default values.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Initialize NVM is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the

button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press the

7 Press the

button until Yes is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.

Understanding the Printer Menus

201

202

Understanding the Printer Menus

Print Media Guidelines

Print media can be paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality
printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing
troubles. This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media, and loading the print media in
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) or Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI).
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in
black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print media,
it is recommended that you try a sample first.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See
"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 and "Loading Print Media in the Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219 for detailed loading instructions.

Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is recommended that you follow these
guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight

Both MPF and PSI automatically feed paper whose weights range from 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 44 lb bond) grain long.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) may not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75
g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.
Curl

Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl
usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped, even in the feeder, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems
regardless of humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF or PSI.
Smoothness

The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse to the
paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.
Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture Content

The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper
properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper
to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction

Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long
fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain short is preferred.

Print Media Guidelines

203

Fiber Content

Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as
cotton possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.

Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use dry 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business paper
designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high
temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing process heats paper
to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is
acceptable for laser printers.
NOTE: Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media,
you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.

Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•

Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless paper, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

•

Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

•

Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit

•

Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such
as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.

•

Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper

•

Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper

•

Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309

•

Multiple-part forms or documents

•

Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc or acid paper.

•

Moist paper that may cause wrinkle

Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
•

Always use new, dry, and undamaged paper.

•

Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated
on the paper package.

•

Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

•

Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.

•

Do not remove the PSI while a job is printing.

•

Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the MPF or PSI.

•

Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.

204

Print Media Guidelines

Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead
When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:
•

Use grain long paper for best results.

•

Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.

•

Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.

•

Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

•

Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copying machines. The ink must
withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or
oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead you have selected is
acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following illustration for help when loading
letterhead in the print media sources.

Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the
printer first.
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

Print Media Guidelines

205

Selecting Pre-Punched Paper
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in manufacturing techniques.
However, it may not be possible to print on the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
•

Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched paper.

•

Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled
paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.

•

Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may require more frequent
cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.

•

Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.

Envelopes
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of light wrinkling. Before buying large
quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first. See "Loading Print Media in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 or "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219
for instructions on loading an envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
•

Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.

•

Set the print media source to MPF or PSI. Set the paper type to Envelope, and select the correct size of envelope
from the printer driver.

•

For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb
bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100% cotton
content must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight.

•

Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.

•

Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with the
envelope supplier.

•

Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.

•

To load envelope in MPF or PSI, the print side must be facing up.

•

See "Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 216 or "Loading an Envelope in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 221 for instructions on loading an envelope.

•

Use one envelope size during a print job.

•

Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%) and the high printing temperatures may
seal the envelopes.

•

For best performance, do not use envelopes that:

206

–

Have excessive curl or twist

–

Are stuck together or damaged in any way

–

Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing

–

Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars

–

Have an interlocking design

–

Have postage stamps attached

–

Have nicked edges or bent corners

Print Media Guidelines

–

Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.
When selecting labels:
•

Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C
(401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi).

•

Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
CAUTION: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.

When printing on labels:
•

Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.

•

Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.

•

Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.

•

Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the
label.

•

Do not print a label through the printer more than once.

•

Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.

•

Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.

•

Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.

•

Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is recommended that zone coating of the
adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your printer and
could void your warranty.
WARNING: Otherwise a jam occurs in the printer and contaminate your printer and your cartridges with adhesive. As a result,
could void your printer and cartridge warranties.

Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems and uneven print
quality.
•

For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the
relative humidity is 40%.

•

Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.

•

If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
that the edges do not buckle or curl.

•

Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Print Media Guidelines

207

Identifying Print Media and Specifications
This section provides information on supported paper sizes, types, and specification.

Supported Paper Sizes
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

A4 (210x297 mm)

B5 (182x257 mm)

A5 (148x210 mm)

C5 (162x229 mm)

Monarch (3.875x7.5 in)

Y*4

Envelope #10 (4.125x9.5 in)

DL (110x220 mm)

Y*4

Letter (8.5x11 in)

Legal (8.5x14 in)

Folio (8.5x13 in)

Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)

Custom*2*3

Monarch LEF (7.5x3.875

DL LEF (220x110

in)*1

mm)*1

You can place the originals in a long-edge feed direction or in a short-edge feed direction. The following illustration shows SEF and LEF.
The arrow mark in the illustration shows the orientation of the paper loading.

NOTE: Not available when the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Printer Driver is used.
*2

Custom width: 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)
The maximum width for envelope (DL LEF): 220.0 mm (8.66 inches)
Custom length: 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)
The maximum length for envelope (Monarch LEF): 98.4 mm (3.87 inches)

Only the administrator user can set the custom size from the printer driver.

Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is loaded on the MPF will be fed.

SEF

208

Print Media Guidelines

LEF

Supported Paper Types
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)

Plain

Media

Plain Side 2

Plain Thick

Plain Thick Side 2

Recycled

Recycled Side 2

Label

Covers

Covers Side 2

Envelope

Coated

Coated Side 2

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Paper Type Specifications
Paper type

Weight (gsm)

Remarks

Plain Paper

60-90

Plain Thick Paper

91-105

Covers

106-163

Coated

106-163

Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Label

Inkjet printer paper cannot be used.

Envelopes

Recycled

60-105

Print Media Guidelines

209

210

Print Media Guidelines

Loading Print Media

Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is usually on
the print media package.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: After loading paper in the feeder, specify the same paper type on the operator panel.

Capacity
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) can hold:
•

150 sheets of standard paper

•

16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of thick paper

•

One sheet of coated paper

•

16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of post cards

•

Five envelopes

•

16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of labels

Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can hold:
•

10 sheets of standard paper or one sheet of other paper

Print Media Dimensions
Both MPF and PSI accept print media within the following dimensions:
•

Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)

•

Length — 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)

Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
1 Open the front cover.

Loading Print Media

211

2 Pull the PSI out.

3 Pull the length guide forward until it stops.

4 Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.

212

Loading Print Media

5 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum.

6 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.

7 Load print media on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.

Loading Print Media

213

8 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.

9 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.

NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension backward until it stops, and then pinch the
length guide and slide it backward until it touches print media.

214

Loading Print Media

10 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.

11 Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than plain print media is loaded. If a
user-specified print media is loaded in the MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the operator
panel.
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.

Loading Print Media

215

Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the printer driver. If not specified, the print
image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing down, and the flap turned to the right.

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to be loaded with the print-side facing up,
flap opened, and facing you.

216

Loading Print Media

When Loading C5

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.

CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the

printer.

NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid
jams, flatten them as shown below when loading them in the MPF.

Loading Print Media

217

NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following
illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes, see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper
Setup Navigator on the printer driver.

Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the
printer first.

218

Loading Print Media

Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the PSI while printing is in progress.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.
1 Open the front cover.

2 Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper tray.

3 Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum.

Loading Print Media

219

4 Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack
on a level surface.

5 Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the recommended print side facing up.

6 Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of print media.

7 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper. If a
user-specified print media is loaded in the PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.

220

Loading Print Media

Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
NOTE: Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is loaded on the MPF will be fed.
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the printer driver. If not specified, the print
image will be rotated 180 degrees.
When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or Monarch

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing down, and the flap turned to the right.

To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to be loaded with the print-side facing up,
flap opened, and facing you.

Loading Print Media

221

When Loading C5

Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.

CAUTION: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to paper jams and can cause damage to the

printer.

NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid
jams, flatten them as shown below when loading them in the PSI.

222

Loading Print Media

NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following
illustration.
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.

NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes, see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper
Setup Navigator on the printer driver.

Loading Letterhead
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that the title on the letterhead enters the
printer first.

Loading Print Media

223

Loading Print Media When Manual Duplex Printing
NOTE: When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the feeder.
When you start manual duplex printing, the instruction window appears. Note that the window cannot be reopened
once it is closed. Do not close the window until duplex printing is complete.
Manual duplex printing can be done using the MPF or PSI.

When Using the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
1 First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page 4, then page 2.
Ready / Error LED blinks and the message appears on the operator panel when the even pages finish printing.

2 After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output tray and set them as they are (with the
blank side facing up) into the MPF.

NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them before setting them.
NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document consists of various sizes of papers.
3 Ensure that Insert Output to Tray Press
to Continue Printing is highlighted, and then
(Set) button. Print pages in the order page 1 (rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5
press the
(rear of page 6).

224

Loading Print Media

When Using the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)
1 First print the even pages (rear sides).
For a six page document, even pages are printed in the order page 6, page 4, then page 2.
Ready / Error LED blinks and the message appears on the operator panel when the even pages finish printing.

2 After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output tray and set them as they are (with the
blank side facing up) into the PSI.

Loading Print Media

225

Using the Output Tray Extension
The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the printer after the print job is
complete.
Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully extended.

NOTE: When you pull out envelopes or small size print media, lift up the scanner unit.

226

Loading Print Media

Printing, Copying, Scanning,
and Faxing
18 Printing........................................................................................ 229
19 Copying ....................................................................................... 233
20 Scanning..................................................................................... 245
21 Faxing.......................................................................................... 267

227

228

Printing

This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information from your printer, and how to cancel a
job.

Tips for Successful Printing
Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media" on page 207.

Avoiding Paper Jams
NOTE: It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are considering using with the printer before
purchasing large quantities.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid paper jams. See the following instructions
on loading print media:
•

"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211

•

"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219

•

"Avoiding Jams" on page 323

If you experience a jam, see "Jam" on page 350 for instructions.

Sending a Job to Print
Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you choose Print from an application, a window
representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are sending to print.
Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over the default menu settings selected from the operator
panel or Tool Box.
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the available system settings you can change. If
you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.
To print a job from a typical Microsoft® Windows® application:
1 Open the file you want to print.
2 From the File menu, select Print.
3 Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the system settings as needed (such as the pages
you want to print or the number of copies).
4 To adjust system settings not available from the first screen, such as Quality, Paper Size, or Image Orientation, click
Preferences.
The Printing Preferences dialog box appears.
5 Specify the print settings. For more information, click Help.
6 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
7 Click Print to send the job to the selected printer.

Printing

229

Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a print job.

Canceling From the Operator Panel
To cancel a job after it has started printing:
1 Press the

(Cancel) button.

NOTE: Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will continue to print.

Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar

When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1 Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2 Select the job you want to cancel.
3 Press on the keyboard.
Canceling a Job From the Desktop

1 Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
Click Start → Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2).
Click Start → Printers and Faxes (for Windows XP and 2003).
Click Start → Control Panel → Hardware and Sound → Printers (for Windows Vista®).
Click Start → Control Panel → Printers (for Windows Server 2008).
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware and Sound →
Devices and Printers (for Windows 8).
Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel → Hardware →
Devices and Printers (for Windows Server 2012).
A list of available printers appears.
2 Right-click the printer that you selected when you sent the job for print, and then select See what's printing.
3 Select the printer driver.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
4 Select the job you want to cancel.
5 Press on the keyboard.

230

Printing

Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device
The Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB storage device by operating from the
operator panel.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for USB-Print is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password
to use the print function. If the Function Enabled setting for USB-Print is set to Off, the print function is disabled. For
details, see "Function Enabled" on page 197.

Supported File Formats
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB storage device.
•

PDF

•

TIFF (single page only)

•

JPEG

Printing a File in a USB Memory
1 Insert a USB storage device to the USB port of the printer.

USB Memory appears.
2 Ensure that Print From is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

Select Document appears.
3 Press the

button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

4 Select printing options as required.
NOTE: Only PDF/TIFF/JPEG files created using the scan features of your printer can be printed through USB Direct Print.

Printing a Report Page
By using the Report / List menu, you can print a various of settings for your printer including printer settings,
panel settings, job history, error history, color test page, protocol monitor, address book, and fax activity. For details
about how to print reports or lists, see "Report / List" on page 174.

Printing

231

232

Printing

Copying

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use
the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to Off, the copy function is disabled. For details, see
"Function Enabled" on page 197.

Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For more
details, see "Loading Print Media" on page 211.

Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) to load an original document for
copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job using the
ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass.
WARNING: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 in. by 5.5 in. (139.7 mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by 14
in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having
other unusual characteristics in ADF.
WARNING: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled
or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF.
WARNING: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as
glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.

Making Copies From the Document Glass
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the
document glass.
NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy printout. For best results, clean the document
glass before use. For more information, see "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 320.

Copying

233

To make a copy from the document glass:
1 Open the document cover.

2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner
of the glass.

3 Close the document cover.
NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the
stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.
4 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the contrast, and the image quality. For
more information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 235.
To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.
5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: Press the

234

Copying

(Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document.

Making Copies From the ADF
CAUTION: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF
output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
1 Load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents face up on the ADF with top edge of the documents in first.
Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size.

NOTE: Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size document.
2 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality. For more
information, see "Setting Copy Options" on page 235.
To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.
3 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: Press the

(Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document.

Setting Copy Options
Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the

(Start) button to make copies.

NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.

Number of Copies
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired value.
4 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Copying

235

Color
To select mode for color or black and white copying.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the
3 Press the
4 Press the

(Copy) button.
(Color Mode) button to select the desired color mode.
(Start) button to begin copying.

NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to On(Color Password), you need to enter the four digit
password to use the copy function. If the Function Enabled setting for Copy is set to Off, the copy function is disabled. For
details, see "Function Enabled" on page 197.

Collated
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page
document will print followed by the second complete document.
NOTE: Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available memory.
If a memory shortage occurs, cancel the collating by turning Collated to Uncollated on the operator panel.

1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Ensure that Collated is highlighted, and then press the
4 Press the

(Set) button.

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Uncollated*

Does not sort the copy job

Collated

Sorts the copy job

Auto

Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job

5 If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality. See "Setting
Copy Options" on page 235.
6 Press the

236

Copying

(Start) button to begin copying.

Reduce/Enlarge
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy original documents
from the document glass or ADF.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or Manual.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Reduce/Enlarge is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set) button.

mm series

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
200%
A5->A4(141%)
A5->B5(122%)
100%*
B5->A5(81%)
A4->A5(70%)
50%

inch series

200%
Stmt->Lgl(154%)
Stmt->Ltr(129%)
100%*
Lgl->Ltr (78%)
Ldgr->Ltr(64%)
50%

NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25% to 400%, or press the
enlarge the zoom ratio or press the

5 Press the

button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.

button to

(Start) button to begin copying.

Copying

237

Document Size
To specify the default document size:
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Document Size is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.
A4 (210 x 297 mm)*1
A5 (148 x 210 mm)
B5 (182 x 257 mm)
Letter (8.5 x 11")*1
Folio (8.5 x 13")
Legal (8.5 x 14")
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")
*1

The default for
Document Size varies
depending on country specific
factory default.

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Original Type
To select the copy image quality.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Original Type is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

NOTE:

Suitable for documents with text.

Text & Photo*

Used for documents with both text and photos.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

5 Press the

238

Copying

(Set) button.

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Text

(Start) button to begin copying.

(Set) button.

Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the
3 Press the
4 Press the

(Copy) button.
button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then press the
or

(Set) button.

button to select the desired settings, and then press the
*

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.
Lighter2

Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Sharpness
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Sharpness is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button to select the desired settings, and then press the

NOTE:
Sharpest

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Makes the copy sharper than the original.

Sharper
Normal*

Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.

Softer

Makes the copy softer than the original.

Softest

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Copying

239

Auto Exposure
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Auto Exposure is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

(Set) button.

Multiple-Up
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.

Auto:
Automatically
reduces the pages
to fit in one page.

ID Copy:
Always prints two
sides of the ID card
in one page in the
original size (by
100%).

Manual:
Reduces the pages in the
custom size depending
on the setting of the
Reduce/Enlarge
menu.

240

Copying

2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Multiple-Up is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

Off*

Does not perform multiple-up printing.

Auto

Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.

ID Copy

Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.

Manual

Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.

5 If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality. See "Setting
Copy Options" on page 235.
6 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

When you are using the document glass and Multiple-Up is set to Auto, ID Copy, or Manual, the display
(Set) button.
prompts you for another page. Press the
button to select Yes or No, and then press the
7 If you select Yes, press the

button to select Continue or Cancel, and then press the

(Set) button.

Margin Top/Bottom
To specify the top and bottom margins of the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Margin Top/Bottom is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the
button.

(Set) button.
(Set)

button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
4 mm*/0.2 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Margin Left/Right
To specify the left and right margins of the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.

Copying

241

2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Margin Left/Right is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the
button.

(Set) button.

button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set)

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.

4 mm*/0.2 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

5 Press the

(Start) button to begin copying.

Margin Middle
To specify the middle margin of the copy.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Copy) button.

3 Press the

button until Margin Middle is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the
button.

button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad, and then press the

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
0 mm*/0.0 inch*

Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.

Available Range:
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch

5 Press the

242

Copying

(Set) button.

(Start) button to begin copying.

(Set)

Changing the Default Settings
The COPY menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set to the most frequently used modes.
When you copy a document, the default settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding
buttons on the operator panel.
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing the AC (All Clear) button cancels the changed settings and returns to the default

status.

To create your own default settings:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

3 Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the
4 Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted, and then press the
5 Press the

(Set) button.

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the
or
then press the

(Set) button.

button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and
(Set) button.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Copying

243

244

Copying

Scanning
Scanning Overview

NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Scan is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use
the scan function. If the Function Enabled setting for Scan is set to Off, the scan function is disabled. For details, see
"Function Enabled" on page 197.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
You can use your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer to turn pictures and text into editable
images on your computer.
PaperPort® is a program that allows you to organize, find and share all your paper and digital documents, and is
supplied with your printer.
NOTE: PaperPort may not be supported depending on the operating systems.
NOTE: PaperPort application is available only on the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer. The licensed
software application is not available for download from support.dell.com.
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the image or
document after you scan it in to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.
Type

Resolution

Documents

300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or color

Documents of poor quality or that contain small text

400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale

Photographs and pictures

100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale

Images for an inkjet printer

150–300 dpi

Images for a high-resolution printer

300–600 dpi

Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you require a
resolution above those recommended in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.
NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software to copy text from scanned documents so
that you can use and edit the text in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process requires
textual images scanned at 150–600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is recommended for graphics.
If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe® Photoshop®, you must assign the application to the printer
by selecting it from the list of available applications through the Select Software button each time you start
scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button, PaperPort is automatically selected
when you start scanning.
Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort application that allows you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or
other programs on your computer without first running PaperPort. Dell ScanCenter runs as a separate application
from the Microsoft® Windows® start menu and displays the Dell ScanCenter bar. For more information about
using Dell ScanCenter, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.
NOTE: Dell ScanCenter may not be supported depending on the operating systems.

Scanning

245

Icons on the Dell ScanCenter bar represent the programs that are limited to PaperPort and to Dell ScanCenter. To
scan and send an item to a program, click the program icon and then scan the item. Dell ScanCenter automatically
starts the selected program when the scan is complete.

Scanning From the Operator Panel - Scan to Application
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the
3 Press the

(Scan) button.
button until Scan to Application is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

4 Configure the scanning settings as necessary.
5 Press the

(Start) button.

The selected application window opens on your computer.
NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select Dell C1765 MFP Scan Button Manager, and then click

OK.

NOTE: Once you check the Always use this program for this action check box when selecting Dell C1765 MFP Scan Button
Manager, the selected application is automatically used without displaying the program selection window.
NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning. For details, see "Quick Launch
Utility" on page 292.

246

Scanning

Scanning from the Operator Panel - Scan to WSD
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you can use the Scan
to WSD function to send scanned images to a computer.
NOTE: To use Scan to WSD, you need to setup connection using WSD.
NOTE: WSD is supported only on Windows Vista®, Windows 7, and Windows 8.

Printer Setup for Scan to WSD
Setup the printer and computer for connection using WSD.
Checking the Printer Setting

To use the Scan to WSD function, WSD needs to be set to Enable. See "Protocol" on page 179 for details.
Setting Up the Computer

NOTE: For Windows 8, the computer automatically connects the printer using WSD. There is no need to install the printer
manually.
For Windows 7:

1 Click Start → Computer → Network
2 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install. The printer is connected using WSD.
For Windows Vista:

1 Click Start → Network
2 Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install.
3 Click Continue. The printer is connected using WSD.

Procedures for WSD Scan
1 Load the document(s) facing up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document facing down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the
3 Press the

(Scan) button.
button until Scan to WSD is highlighted, and then press the

4 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Press the
button until the desired computer you want to send the scan job to is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button.
6 Press the

button until the desired scan event is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: Which application each scan event is associated with depends on the setting on the computer.
7 Press the

(Start) button.

Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN) driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one
of the standard components provided by Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server®
2003, and Windows Server 2008, and works with various scanners.

Scanning

247

NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
To scan an image from the PaperPort:
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 On the Windows Start menu, click Nuance PaperPort 14 from All Programs, and then click PaperPort (for
Windows 8, click the PaperPort icon on the Start screen).
3 In the Desktop tab, click Scan Settings in the Function Pane group.
4 Click Select in the Scan or Get Photo pane.
5 In the Available Scanners dialog box, select TWAIN: Dell C1765 MFP Scanner and then click OK.
6 Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview image.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.

7 Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options tabs.
8 Click Scan to start scanning.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.

Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by
Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the
WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Start the drawing software, such as Paint for Windows.

248

Scanning

NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows Photo Gallery instead of Paint.
3 Click File → From Scanner or Camera (Paint button → From scanner or camera for Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows Server 2008 R2, and Windows Server 2012).
The Scan using Dell C1765 MFP Scanner window appears.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.

4 Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the
Advanced Properties dialog box.
5 Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK.
6 Click Scan to start scanning.
7 Click Save As from the File menu.
8 Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.

Scanning to a PC or Server via SMB/FTP
Overview
The Scan to Server/Computer feature allows you to scan documents and send the scanned document to a network
computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.

Scanning

249

Computer

FTP Server

Scan
Using FTP

Using SMB
Computer

You can select the kind of server and specify a destination to store the scanned document with the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
The following items are required to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.
•

Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating systems that includes folder
sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.

•

Windows XP

•

Windows Vista

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 8

•

Windows Server 2003

•

Windows Server 2008

•

Windows Server 2008 R2

•

Windows Server 2012

•

Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6

Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server (login name and
password) are required.
•

Windows XP
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0/4.0 or Internet Information Services 5.0/5.1

•

Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 R2
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0

•

Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 8.0

250

Scanning

•

Mac OS X
FTP service of Mac OS X 10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8

For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system administrator.
Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.

"Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 251

"Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on page 252

"Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259

"Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 263

Confirming a Login name and Password
When using SMB:

The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for
authentication. Confirm a login user name and password.

If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password on your User Login Account with the
following procedure.
For Windows Vista and Windows 7:

1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.

Scanning

251

For Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012

1 Right-click the bottom left corner of the screen, and then click Control Panel.
2 Click Change PC settings.
3 Click Users.
4 Click Create a Password and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows XP:

1 Click start → Control Panel → User Accounts.
2 Click Change an account.
3 Select your account.
4 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008:

1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Double-click User Accounts.
3 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:

1 Click Start → Control Panel.
2 Select User Accounts.
3 Click User Accounts.
4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6

1 Click System Preferences → Accounts.
2 Select Change Password.
3 Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
4 Re-enter the password in Verify.
After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to "Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on
page 252.
When using FTP

The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user name and a password. For your user name and password,
contact your system administrator.

Specifying a Destination to Store the Document
When using SMB

Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.
For Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.

252

Scanning

3 Click the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.
4 Select the Share this folder check box.
5 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.

6 Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder.
7 Click Add.
8 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select
box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).

Scanning

253

9 Click OK when you are done.
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full Control check box. This will grant you
permission to send the document to this folder.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.

11 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259.
For Windows XP Home Edition:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
2 Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.
3 Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network.
4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.

254

Scanning

NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the security risks but want to share files without
running the wizard, click here, then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.

5 Select Allow network users to change my files.

Scanning

255

6 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259.
For Windows XP Professional Edition:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare) and double-click
the folder.
2 Select Folder Options from Tools.

3 Click View tab, and then clear the checkbox of Use simple file sharing (Recommended).

4 Click OK, and then close the window.
5 Right-click the folder, and then select Properties.
6 Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder.
7 Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.

256

Scanning

8 Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
9 Click Add.
10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select
box and click Check Names to confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).

11 Click OK.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
12 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full Control check box. This will grant you
permission to send the document into this folder.

Scanning

257

13 Click OK.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 259.
For Mac OS X 10.4:

1 Select Go from the Finder menu, and then click Home.
2 Double-click Public.
3 Create a folder (Example of folder name, MyShare).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Check the File Sharing check box and the Windows Sharing check box.
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:

1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare).
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
2 Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.
3 Check the Shared folder check box, and then close the window.
4 Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5 Check the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
6 Check the Share Files and folders using SMB check box and your account name.
7 Click Done.
When Using FTP

For a destination to store the document, contact your system administrator.

258

Scanning

Configuring the Printer Settings
You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature with the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool

1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar.
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying the IP Settings" on page 55.
3 Click Go.
The printer's web page appears.
4 Click Address Book if a security login dialog box appears, type in the correct user name and password.
NOTE: The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL).

5 Click the Server Address tab.
6 Select any unused number and click Create.

The Server Address page appears.

Scanning

259

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
1

Name

Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.

Server Type

Select SMB if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer.
Select FTP if you use a FTP server.

Server Address

Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.
IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported.
The following are examples:
• For FTP:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100
• For SMB:
Server name: myhost
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100

Share Name

For SMB only.
On the Windows operating system, enter the share name of the folder to store the scanned
document on the recipient computer.
On the Mac OS, enter the folder name to store the scanned document on the recipient
computer.

260

Scanning

Server Path

For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder, leave
the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder, enter the path as
following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder
name: John
You should now see MyShare\Mypic\John in your directory.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John
In this case, enter the following item.
Server Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the server path to store the scanned document.

Server Port Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB
and 21 for FTP.

Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP
server.

Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.

NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Computer feature. Ensure that you have a valid

password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 251 for
details on how to add a password in your user login account.)
9

Re-enter Password

Re-enter your password.

After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 263.
From the Address Book Editor

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Address Book Editor.
The Select Device window appears.
2 Select your printer from the list.
3 Click OK.
4 Click Tool → New (Device Address Book) → Server.

Scanning

261

The Server Address dialog box appears.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:

Name

Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Server address book.

Server Type

Select Computer (SMB) if you store the document in a shared folder of your computer.
Select Server (FTP) if you use a FTP server.

262

Computer Settings
wizard

Scanning

Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides you through several steps.
When you complete the steps in the wizard, the items 4 to 10 are entered automatically. For
details, click Help.

Sever Name /
IP Address

Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.
IPv4 and IPv6 are both supported.
The following are examples:
• For Computer (SMB):
Server name: myhost
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100
• For Server (FTP):
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address (IPv4): 192.168.1.100

Share Name

Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.

Path

For SMB
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly without creating any subfolder, leave
the space blank.
To store the scanned document in the folder you created under the share folder, enter the path as
following.
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder
name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
MyShare (Share folder)
MyPic
John
In this case, enter the following item.
Path: \MyPic\John
For FTP
Enter the path to store the scanned document.

Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or FTP
server.

Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.

NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Server/Computer feature. Ensure that you have a
valid password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password" on
page 251 for details on how to add a password in your user login account).

Confirm Login
Password

Re-enter your password.

Port Number

Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB
and 21 for FTP.

After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 263.

Sending the Scanned File on the Network
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR

Scanning

263

Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the
3 Press the

(Scan) button.
button until Scan to Network is highlighted, and then press the

4 Ensure that Scan to is highlighted, press the

(Set) button.

5 Press the
button to select Computer(Network) or Server(FTP), or Search Address book, and
(Set) button.
then press the
Computer(Network): Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB protocol.
Server(FTP): Stores the scanned image on the server by using the FTP protocol.
Search Address Book: Select the server address registered in Address Book.
6 Press the

button to select the destination to store the scanned file in, and then press the

7 Press the

(Start) button to send the scanned files.

(Set) button.

Scanning to USB Storage Device
The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB storage device.
To scan documents and save them, follow the steps below:
1 Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on your printer.

2 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
3 Press the

(Scan) button.

4 Ensure that Scan to USB Memory is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Press the

button until the your desired folder is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the

(Start) button.

264

Scanning

(Set) button.

Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow the steps below:
•

Set up E-Mail Server Settings of E-Mail Alert on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "E-Mail Alert" on
page 100 for more details. For information about your e-mail server, contact your system administrator or your local
Internet service provider (ISP).

•

Setup the e-mail address book through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Setting an E-Mail Address
Book" on page 265 for more details.

Setting an E-Mail Address Book
1 Open a web browser.
2 Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click Go. The printer's Web page appears.
3 Click the Address Book tab.
The login dialog box appears.
4 Type in the administrator login ID and password registered on the printer.
5 Click Address Book.

Scanning

265

6 Click Create.

7 Enter a name and e-mail address in the Name and E-Mail Address fields.
8 Click Apply New Settings.

Sending an E-Mail With the Scanned File
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the
3 Press the

(Scan) button.
button until Scan to E-Mail is highlighted, and then press the

4 Ensure that E-Mail to is highlighted, and then press the
5 Press the

(Set) button.

button to select the setting listed below, and then press the

Keypad: Type the e-mail address directly and then press the

(Set) button.

Address Book: Select the e-mail address registered in the E-Mail Address Book, and then press the
button.
E-Mail Group: Select the e-mail group registered in the E-Mail Groups, and then press the
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel.
6 Press the

266

Scanning

(Start) button to send e-mail.

(Set)

(Set) button.

Faxing

NOTE: If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to On(Password), you need to enter the four digit password to use the
fax function. If the Function Enabled setting for Fax is set to Off, the fax function is disabled. For details, see "Function
Enabled" on page 197.
NOTE: If the Panel Lock Set is set to Enable, you need to enter the four digit password to enter the Admin Menu.

Configuring Fax Initial Settings
NOTE: The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy Setup Navigator.

Setting Your Country
You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service on the printer.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Country is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the

button to select the country where the printer is used, and then press the

7 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set)

button to select Yes, and then press the

The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.
NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the information, which is registered to the device, is
initialized.

Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The printer ID,
containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from
your printer.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Fax Number is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

6 Enter your fax number using the number keypad.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the

(Backspace) button to delete the last digit.

7 Press the

(Set) button when the number on the display is correct.

8 Press the

button until Fax Header Name is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

9 Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad, including special symbols by pressing the 1, *,
and # buttons.

Faxing

267

For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to
Enter Characters" on page 94.
10 Press the

(Set) button when the name on the display is correct.

11 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Setting the Time and Date
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the printer occurs.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until System Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press the

6 Ensure that Set Date is highlighted, and then press the
7 Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or press the
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the

(Set) button.

button to select the correct date.
button to re-enter the digit.

(Set) button when the date on the display is correct.

9 Press the

button until Set Time is highlighted, and then press the

11 Press the

(Set) button.

8 Press the

10 Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or press the

(Set) button.

button to select the correct time.

(Set) button when the time on the display is correct.

12 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Changing the Clock Mode
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until System Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Press the

button until Date Format is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

7 Press the

button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press the

8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

(Back) button.

Setting Sounds
Speaker Volume
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Line Monitor is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Press the

button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

268

Faxing

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Ringer Volume
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the

button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

7 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Specifying the Fax Settings
Changing the Fax Settings Options
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the

7 Press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad.

(Set) button to save the selection.

8 If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7.
9 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Faxing

269

Available Fax Settings Options
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:
Option

Description

Receive Mode

Telephone

Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the
handset of the external telephone, and then pressing the remote receive code.

Fax

Automatically receives faxes.

Telephone/Fax

When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone rings for
the time specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps from the
internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.

Ans Machine/Fax

The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In this
mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial transmission in your
country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.

DRPD

Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a separate
number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to
monitor for that specific ring pattern.

Auto Rec Fax

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.

Auto Rec TEL/FAX

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external telephone
receives an incoming call.

Auto Rec Ans/FAX

Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after the external answering
machine receives an incoming call.

Line Monitor

Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal
speaker until a connection is made.

Ring Tone Volume

Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.

Line Type

Sets the line type.

Tone/Pulse

Sets the dialing type.

Resend Delay

Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.

Redial Attempts

Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy. If you enter
0, the printer will not redial.

Redial Delay

Specifies the interval between redial attempts.

Junk Fax Setup

Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the fax
numbers registered in the Phone Book.

Remote Receive

Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone.

Remote Rcv Tone

Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.

Fax Header

Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of faxes.

Fax Header Name

Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be
entered.

Fax Number

Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.

Fax Cover Page

Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.

DRPD Pattern

Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a service provided by some telephone
companies.

270

Faxing

Option

Description

Forward Settings

Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.

Fax Fwd Number

Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded.

Prefix Dial

Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.

Prefix Dial Num

Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started.
It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).

Discard Size

Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit
onto the output paper. Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page.

ECM

Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.

Modem Speed

Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.

Fax Activity

Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax
communications.

Fax Transmit

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.

Fax Broadcast

Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or
only when an error occurs.

Protocol Monitor

Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission or only when an error
occurs.

Country

Sets the country where the printer is used.

Prefix Dial

NOTE: Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must
do the following from the operator panel.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Line Type is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the

button until PBX is highlighted, and then press the

7 Press the

(Back) button to return to the previous menu.

8 Press the

button until Prefix Dial is highlighted, and then press the

9 Press the

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

10 Press the

(Back) button to return to the previous menu.

11 Press the

button until Prefix Dial Num is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

12 Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number from 0–9, *, and #.
13 Press the

(Set) button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct.

14 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.

Faxing

271

Sending a Fax
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from the computer running a
Microsoft® Windows® operating system.

Loading an Original Document on the ADF
CAUTION: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35 sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF
output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document glass instead of the ADF.
1 Place the document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document
guides to the correct document size.

2 Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 273.

Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass
1 Open the document cover.

272

Faxing

2 Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner
of the glass.

3 Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 273.
4 Close the document cover.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it takes priority over the document on the
document glass.
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and
then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.

Resolution
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission:
1 Press the

(Fax) button.

2 Press the

button until Resolution is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Standard*

Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dotmatrix printer.

Super Fine

Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports the super fine resolution.

Ultra Fine

Suitable for documents containing photographic images.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest resolution supported by the receiving device.

Original Type
To select the default original type for the current fax job:
1 Press the
2 Press the

(Fax) button.
button until Original Type is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

Faxing

273

3 Press the

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

Text

Suitable for documents with text.

Photo

Suitable for documents with photos.

(Set) button.

Lighter/Darker
To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original:
1 Press the

(Fax) button.

2 Press the

button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button to select the desired setting, and then press the

(Set) button.

NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Lighter2

Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.

Lighter1
Normal*

Works well with standard typed or printed documents.

Darker1

Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Darker2

Sending a Fax Automatically
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF:
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
4 You can select a fax number in one of the following ways:

274

•

Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button. Press the
button until Phone
(Set) button. Press the
button to select the recipients.
Book is highlighted, and then press the

•

Press the One Touch Dial button.

•

Press the
(Contacts) button, select All Entries, Group Dial, or Search using the
(Set) button.
and then press the

button,

All Entries

Displays a list of registered fax numbers. Press the

Group Dial

Press the

Searches a fax number from the Phone Book. Enter the text you want to search, and then press
the
(Set) button. Press the
button to select the recipients.

button to select the recipients.

(Redial/Pause) button to redial.

•

Press the

•

Press the
(Speed Dial) button. Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric
(Set) button.
keypad, and then press the

Faxing

NOTE: Before you use the One Touch Dial button, you need to register a number for the speed dial. For more information on
how to store the number, see "Automatic Dialing" on page 282.
5 Press the

(Start) button.

When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the
Yes or No, and then press the
(Set) button.

button to select

6 The number is dialed and then the printer begins sending the fax when the remote fax machine is ready.
NOTE: Press the

(Cancel) button to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.

Sending a Fax Manually
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
4 Press the

button until OnHook is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad.
(Start) button.

•

If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the

•

If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press the
(Set) button.
setting appears, and then press the

NOTE: Press the

(Cancel) button and the

(Start) button, press the

button until the desired

(Set) button to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.

Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and returns to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.
If you receive an error message, press the
again.

(Cancel) button to clear the message and try to send the document

You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission. For more
information, see "Printing a Report" on page 287.

Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the printer will automatically redial
the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options"
on page 270.
NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the number was manually entered.

Faxing

275

Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time in order to take
advantage of lower long distance rates.
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 Press the

(Fax) button.

3 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
4 Press the

button until Delayed Start is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

6 Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the
(Set) button.
press the
7 Press the

(Set) button.

button to select the start time, and then

button until Fax to is highlighted, and then press the

8 Ensure that Keypad is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

9 Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set) button.

You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers. For more information, see "Automatic Dialing" on page 282.
Press the

(Start) button to begin faxing.

Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all the documents to be faxed to its memory and sends
them at the specified time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.

Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.

Example
Send data via the Dell C1765nf
Color MFP FAX or Dell C1765nfw
Color MFP FAX driver
Sending machine (Dell
C1765nf/C1765nfw Color
Multifunction Printer)

276

Faxing

Send fax
Receiving machine (fax
machine/multifunction
printer)

For Windows:

NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on
the application you are using.
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell C1765nf Color MFP FAX or Dell C1765nfw
Color MFP FAX.
3 Click Preferences.

4 The Printing Preferences dialog box appears. Specify the fax settings. For more information, click the Help of the
driver.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.

5 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
6 Click Print. The Set / Check Fax Transmission: dialog box appears.

Faxing

277

7 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
•

Enter a name and phone number directly.

•

Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.

•

Select a recipient from a database other than a phone book or address book.

For more information on how to specify the destination, see the Help of the driver.

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked
with a password.

8 Click Start Sending.

278

Faxing

For Macintosh:

NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on
the application you are using.
NOTE: When using a USB connection on Mac OS 10.4.x, upgrade Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) software to version
1.2.12 or later. You can download it from CUPS web site.
1 Open the file you want to send by fax.
2 Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell C1765nf Color MFP Fax or Dell C1765nfw
Color MFP Fax.

3 Specify the fax settings.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
4 Click Print. The Fax Recipient dialog box appears.
5 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:
•

Enter a name and phone number directly.

•

Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.

Faxing

279

NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked
with a password.

6 Click OK.

Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the Telephone/Fax mode or Ans Machine/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the phone
connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the PSI are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying, except that
faxes can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print
Media" on page 211. For details about setting the paper type and size in the PSI, see "Print Media Guidelines" on
page 203.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a specified period of time and receives the
fax.
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after receiving an incoming call, see "Available
Fax Settings Options" on page 270.

Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode
To receive a fax manually, pick up the handset of the external telephone, and follow the instructions below.
1 1 Press the

(Fax) button when you hear fax tones on the external telephone.

OffHook appears.
2 Press the

(Start) button.

3 Press the

button until Manual Receive is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

The printer receives the document.

Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans Machine/Fax Mode
To use the Telephone/Fax mode or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must attach an external telephone to the
phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your printer hears a
fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive a fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Auto Answer Fax and your answering machine is switched off, or no answering
machine is connected to your printer, your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.

Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone
This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the phone connector ( ) on the
back of your printer. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having
to go to the printer.

280

Faxing

When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press the two-digit number on the external
telephone.
The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing the twodigit keys once again.
The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the two-digit number to whatever you choose.
For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 270.
You can also receive the fax by pressing the
(Fax) button when you hear the fax tones on the external telephone.
See "Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode" on page 280.
NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
The DRPD is a telephone company service which allows a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing
patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Press the

button until DRPD Pattern is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

7 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

(Back) button.

To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD mode; see "Available Fax Settings Options" on
page 270.
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone company, ask your
telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.

Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing. If you
receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the
memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer automatically prints
the fax.

Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
1 Press the

(Fax) button.

2 Press the

button until Polling Receive is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until On is highlighted, and then press the

4 Enter the fax number of the remote machine, and then press the

(Set) button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

Faxing

281

NOTE: For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine, see "Sending a Fax Manually" on page 275
or "Sending a Fax Automatically" on page 274.

5 Press the

(Start) button.

Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (01– 99).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change the speed dial number from
the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

4 Press the

button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Ensure that Speed Dial is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Press the
button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and 99 is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button.
7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the
8 Enter the name, and then press the

(Set) button.

9 Ensure that Phone Number is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

10 Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then press the

(Set) button.

(Redial/Pause) button. "-" appears on the display.

To insert a pause between numbers, press the

11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

12 When Are You Sure? is displayed, ensure that Yes is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

13 To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
14 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial
1 Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the document cover.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document on the ADF" on page 272.
2 To enter the speed dial number do either of the following after pressing the

(Fax) button:

•

Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button. Press the
(Set) button.
Dial is highlighted, and then press the

•

Press the

button until Speed

(Speed Dial) button.

3 Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad, and then press the
The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name again, press the

(Set) button.

4 Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more information, see "Resolution" on page 273.

282

Faxing

If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 274.
5 Press the

(Start) button.

6 The document scans to the memory.
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for another page. Press the
button to select
Yes to add more documents or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the
(Set)
button.
7 The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when the remote
fax machine answers.
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For example, if you enter 0*, you
can send a document to the locations registered between 01 and 09.

Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these destinations and
set them under a one-digit group dial location. This allows you to use a group dial number setting to send the same
document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.

Setting Group Dial
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

4 Press the

button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Press the

button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Press the
button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6 is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button.
7 Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the
8 Enter the name, and then press the

(Set) button.

9 Ensure that Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then press the
10 Press the
button until the desired number is highlighted, press the
(Set) button.
and then press the
11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
button to select the speed dial numbers,
(Set) button.

12 When Are You Sure? is displayed, ensure that Yes is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

13 To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.
14 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Editing Group Dial
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected group.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

4 Press the

button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

5 Press the

button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

Faxing

283

6 Press the
button.

button until the group dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press the

(Set)

7 To change the group dial name:
(Set) button.

Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the

Enter a new name, and then press the

Press the

When Are You Sure? is displayed, ensure that Yes is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

button until Apply settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

8 To change the speed dial number:
(Set) button.

Press the

button until Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then press the

Press the
button until the speed dial number that you want to edit is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button.
button to select or deselect the speed dial number. Press the

Press the

When Are You Sure? is displayed, ensure that Yes is highlighted, and then press the

button until Apply settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

9 To delete the group dial:
(Backspace) button.

Press the

Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
button.

button to select Yes, and then press the

(Set)

NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not deleted.
10 If you want to edit another group dial number or enter a new group dial number, repeat steps 5 to 9.
11 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dialing for broadcasting or delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation (For Delayed transmission, see "Specifying the Fax Settings" on
page 269).
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the desired
operation.
Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder or on the document glass
into the memory. The printer dials each of the numbers included in the group.

Printing an Address Book List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a speed dial list.
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Report / List is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Address Book is highlighted, and then press the

A list of your speed dial entries is printed.

284

Faxing

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

Other Ways to Fax
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure
fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is
unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will get saved in the memory. When the mode turns off, any
faxes stored will be printed.
NOTE: Before operation, ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.

6 Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted, and then press the
7 Press the

button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

NOTE: The factory-default password is 0000.
8 To return to the standby mode, press the

(Menu) button.

When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory and the Job Status
screen displays Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax stored.
NOTE: If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the
button until Change Password is highlighted, and then press the
(Set) button. Enter the new password, and then
press the
(Set) button.
To print received documents:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until Job Status is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then press the

4 Enter the password, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1 Access the Secure Receive Set menu by following steps 1 to 6 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:".
2 Press the

button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the

3 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Set) button.

(Back) button.

Faxing

285

Using an Answering Machine

To the wall
jack

Printer

Line

Telephone Answering Device

Phone

You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as shown above.
•

Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax mode and set Auto Rec Ans/FAX to specify the time for the
TAD.

•

When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are received and then starts
receiving the fax.

•

If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax after the ring tone sounds for a
predefined time.

Using a Computer Modem

Line
Printer
To the Internet

Telephone Answering Device

Phone

Computer

If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up Internet connection, connect the computer
modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown above.
•

Set your printer to the Ans Machine/Fax mode and set Auto Rec Ans/FAX to specify the time for the
TAD.

•

Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.

•

Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.

•

Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem.

286

Faxing

Printing a Report
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
Address Book

This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer as Address Book information.
Fax Activity

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Protocol Monitor

This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Procedures:
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Report / List is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until the report or list you want to print is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

The selected report or list is printed.

Changing Fax Defaults
1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

4 Press the

button until Fax Defaults is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then press the

6 Press the
or
then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.

button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter the value using the numeric keypad, and
(Set) button.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.
8 To return to the previous screen, press the

(Back) button.

Faxing

287

288

Faxing

Know Your Printer
22 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only) ... 291
23 Understanding Printer Messages .......................................... 295
24 Specifications............................................................................ 301

289

290

Understanding Your Printer Software
(Windows® Only)

Use the Software and Documentation disc that shipped with your printer to install a combination of software
programs, depending on your operating system.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Printer Status Window
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs, for example, when a paper
jam occurs or toner is running low.
By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs. When an error occurs, the error message
appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when printing in
Printing Status Window Properties.
You can also check the toner level of your printer.

Status Monitor Console
Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status Window for a particular printer.
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a Status Window for a
particular printer.

Dell Supplies Management System
You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the All Programs menu or the desktop icon.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Dell Supplies
Management System.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2 Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3 If you are ordering from the web:
a

Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.

Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System window appears.

Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK.

If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone section.

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only)

291

Quick Launch Utility
Using the Quick Launch Utility window, you can open the Status Window, Tool Box, Troubleshooting, Address
Book Editor, ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility when you install the Dell software.
To open the Quick Launch Utility window:
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Quick Launch Utility.
The Quick Launch Utility dialog box opens.

2 The Quick Launch Utility window provides six buttons; Status Window, Tool Box, Troubleshooting, Address
Book Editor, ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To exit, click X at the top-right of the window.
For details, click Help of each application.

Status Window

Click to open the Printer Status window. See "Printer Status Window" on page 291.

Tool Box
Troubleshooting

Click to open the Tool Box. See "Understanding the Tool Box Menus" on page 139.
*1

Click to open the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you to resolve issues by yourself.

Address Book Editor

Click to open the Address Book Editor, which allows you to create and edit Address Book entries.

ScanButton Manager

Click to open the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to specify how the ScanButton
Manager behaves for scan events that the device generates.

Dell ScanCenter*2

Click to open the Dell ScanCenter.

*1 Troubleshooting Guide is the Portable Document Format (PDF) file. This item needs software to view the document.
*2 Dell ScanCenter may not be displayed depending on the operating systems.

292

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only)

Address Book Editor
2

1
4

Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book
entries from the PC to the Address Book Editor.

Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.

Deletes a selected Address Book entry.

Displays Address Book entries.

NOTE: You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book entries.
For more information about Address Book Editor, see the Help of Address Book Editor.

ScanButton Manager
The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents folder by default, and then you can
open them using the related application. Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the
obtained image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related application.

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only)

293

Dell ScanCenter
Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort® application that allows you to scan items and send them directly to PaperPort or
other programs on your computer without running the PaperPort program first. For more information about using
Dell ScanCenter, refer to PaperPort's Help menu.
NOTE: PaperPort may not be supported depending on the operating systems.
NOTE: PaperPort application is available only on the Software and Documentation disc provided with the printer. The licensed
software application is not available for download from support.dell.com.

294

Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows® Only)

Understanding Printer Messages

The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of the printer and indicates possible printer
problems you must resolve. This chapter describes messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.
CAUTION: When an error code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the
memory of the printer are not secured.

Error-Code

What you can do

001-360

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell™. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

003-340
003-356
005-121

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF" on page 325.

005-301

Close the ADF cover.

006-370

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

007-340
007-371
009-360

Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on page 312.

009-361
009-362
009-363
009-654
010-354

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

010-377
016-315
016-317
016-338
016-344
016-347
016-354
016-355
016-370
016-372
016-374
016-375
016-376
016-377
016-393
016-395

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

016-503

Press the

(Set) button. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set correctly.

016-504

Press the

(Set) button. Check if user name and password for POP3 server and DNS server are set correctly.

016-507

Press the

(Set) button. Check if user name and password used for SMTP server are set correctly.

Understanding Printer Messages

295

Error-Code

What you can do

016-700

Press the

(Set) button to cancel the current print job.

(Set) button. Contact Dell if this message appears repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on

016-745

Press the
page 360.

016-749

Press the

(Set) button to cancel the current print job.

016-764

Press the

(Set) button. Contact SMTP server administrator.

016-767

Press the

(Set) button. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.

016-794

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

Press the

(Set) button. Execute the operation again according to the operation procedure.

016-701
016-720
016-744

016-766

016-795
016-797
016-920
016-921
016-981

(Set) button to cancel the current print job. If you are copying using Collated, change the
Press the
setting to Uncollated and try copying again. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 235.

016-985
017-970

(Set) button. Retry scanning by lowering the resolution setting or changing the file format of the
Press the
scanned image.

017-980

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

017-981
017-988
024-914

Load the specified paper. See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 or
"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219.

024-969

Load the appropriate paper. See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 or
"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219.

026-720

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

026-721
026-722
026-723
026-750
026-751
026-752
027-446

Change IP address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and turn it on again.

027-452
031-521

Press the

(Set) button. Confirm login-able computer with your system administrator.

031-526

Press the
DNS.

(Set) button. Check DNS connection, or check if forwarding destination server is registered with

031-529

Press the

(Set) button. Check if password is correct.

031-530

Press the
(Set) button. Check if storage location is correct. Storage location you specified is DFS setting,
and check if it is linked to other server. Specify directly linked server, share name, and storage location.

296

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

031-533

Press the

031-534

• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.

(Set) button. Check the following:

• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.
Press the

(Set) button. Check if other user is not operating file in storage location you specified.

031-537

Press the

(Set) button. Check if storage location has free space.

031-555

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

031-557

Press the

(Set) button. Change the file name that already exists on FTP server.

031-558

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

031-535
031-536

031-556

031-571
031-574

(Set) button. Check DNS connection, or check if name of forwarding destination server is
Press the
registered with DNS.

031-575

Press the

031-576

(Set) button. Check if the printer communicates with forwarding destination FTP server. For
Press the
example, check connection of network cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.

031-578

Press the

(Set) button. Check if login name (user name) and password are correct.

031-579

Press the

(Set) button. Check if storage location is correct.

031-582

(Set) button. Check if the file name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if
Press the
storage location has free space.

031-584

(Set) button. Check if the folder name you specified can be created in storage location. Check if
Press the
the folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists.

031-585

Press the

(Set) button. Check server access rights.

031-588

Press the

(Set) button. Check if storage location has free space.

031-589

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

031-594

Press the
(Set) button. Execute the operation again according to the operation procedure. Contact Dell if
this message appears repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 360.

031-598

Press the
command.

(Set) button. Check append access right to the file and if server supports FTP append

033-503

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

033-513

Press the

(Set) button. Print the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed.

033-517

Press the

(Set) button. Check if password is correct.

033-518

Press the

(Set) button. Check if your country code is set correctly.

033-519

Press the

(Set) button to clear the message.

(Set) button. Set DNS address, or set forwarding destination server address as IP address.

031-587

033-787
033-788

(Set) button. Remove the received fax, or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed. Press
Press the
(Set) button to clear the message.
the

034-700

(Set) button to clear the message. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
Press the
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 43.

034-701
034-702

Understanding Printer Messages

297

Error-Code

What you can do

034-703

Press the
(Set) button to clear the message. Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 43.

034-704
034-705
034-706
034-707
034-708
034-709
034-710
034-711
034-712
034-713
034-714
034-715
034-716
034-717
034-718
034-719
034-720
034-721
034-722
034-723
034-724
034-725
034-726
034-727
034-750
034-751
034-752
034-753
034-754
034-755
034-756
034-757
034-758
034-759
034-760
034-761
034-762
034-763
034-764
034-765

298

Understanding Printer Messages

Error-Code

What you can do

034-766
034-767
034-768
062-321

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

062-790

Press the

075-100

Check and clear the paper path, load the specified paper, and then press the
Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer" on page 329.

075-921

Load paper for the second side (odd) pages, and press the
When Manual Duplex Printing" on page 224.

077-100

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 323.

(Set) button.
(Set) button. See "Clearing

(Set) button. See Figure "Loading Print Media

077-101
077-102

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer" on page 330.

077-104

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 323.

077-105
077-300

Close the rear cover.

077-900

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray" on page 332.

077-901

Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 323.

091-402

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

092-310

Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor" on page 316.

093-423

Replace the specified toner cartridge soon. Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.

093-424

See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.

093-425
093-426
093-919

Re-install or replace the specified toner cartridge. See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.

093-920
093-921
093-922
093-930
093-931
093-932

Remove the specified toner cartridge and install a new one. If you do not replace the toner cartridge, print
quality problems may occur. Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.

093-933
093-960
093-961
093-962

Replace the specified toner cartridge with the supported one. Order a new consumable from
www.dell.com/supplies.
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.

093-963
093-970

Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on page 312.

093-971
093-972
093-973

Understanding Printer Messages

299

Error-Code

What you can do

117-331

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

117-332
117-333
117-334
117-340
117-342
117-343
117-344
117-346
117-348
117-349
117-350
117-351
117-366
124-333
134-211

Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on
page 360.

191-310
193-700

300

This message indicates the printer is in the non-Dell toner mode.

Understanding Printer Messages

Specifications

NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Operating System Compatibility
Your Dell™ C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer is compatible with Microsoft® Windows® XP,
Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit
Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012,
Mac OS X Version 10.4.11, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, and 10.8.

Power Supply
Rated Voltage

220-240 VAC

110-127 VAC

Frequency

50/60 Hz

Current

5.0 A

11.0 A

Dimensions
Height: 338 mm (13.31 inches) Width: 410 mm (16.14 inches) Depth: 379 mm (14.92 inches)
Weight (only the toner cartridges are included):
•

Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer: 14.8 kg (32.63 lb)

•

Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer: 14.9 kg (32.85 lb)

Memory
Base memory

128 MB

Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and
Interface
PDL/Emulations

Host-based printing system

OSes

Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit
Edition, Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows 8, Windows 8 64-bit Edition,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008,
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2012,
Mac OS X Version 10.4.11, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, and 10.8.

Interfaces

Standard local:

USB 2.0

Standard network:

10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g (Wireless)
(Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction
Printer only)

Specifications

301

MIB Compatibility
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as
adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the network
(analyze performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell C1765nf/C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer complies with
standard industry MIB specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various printer and
network management software systems.

Environment
Operation
Temperature

10-32°C

Relative humidity

10-85% RH (no condensation)

Print Quality Guarantee

Temperature

15-28°C

Relative humidity

20-70% RH (no condensation)

Storage
Temperature range

-20-40°C

Storage humidity range

5-80% RH (no condensation)

Altitude
Operating

Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)

Storage

70.9275 Kpa

NOTE: For more information on adjusting the altitude, see "Adjust Altitude" on page 151.

302

Specifications

Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type

Connection specifications and symbols

Ethernet

10 Base-T/100 Base-TX

USB

USB 2.0

Wall Jack Connector

Phone Connector

1
2
3
4

Specifications

303

Copy Specifications
Item

Description

Copy Resolution

Optical: 600x600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch),
ADF: 600x300 dots/25.4mm (1 inch)
(Same for Color/Black&White)

Copy Speed

Color 12 cpm or more, Black&White 15 cpm or more (When using the document glass to
make sequential copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)
Color 2.87 cpm or more, Black&White 10.64 cpm or more (When using the ADF to make
sequential copies of multiple documents.)

Paper Size

A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch, DL, C5, Envelope #10

Zoom Rate

Document glass: 25% - 400%, ADF: 25% - 400%

Multiple copies

1 - 99 pages

Copy mode (=Original Type)

Text, Text & Photo, Photo

Scanning method

Platen: Document-fixed flatbed scanning method
ADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning method (one side scanning)

Scanner Specifications
Item

Description

Compatibility

Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN), Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

Scan Resolution

TWAIN: 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
WIA: 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm
(1 inch)
Resolutions other than the following are achieved by driver's resolution conversion:
200 x 200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
300 x 300 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch) (Default)
600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)
1200 x 1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)

Color bit depth

24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)

Mono bit depth

1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Gray scale

Effective scanning length

Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)

Effective scanning width

215.9 mm (8.5 inches)

Scan speed (Text mode)

Black&White:
641.22 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
1265.19 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))
Color:
2176.52 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),
4363.36 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))

304

Specifications

Facsimile Specifications
Item

Description

Compatibility

ITU-T Group 3

Applicable line

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)

Data coding

Black&White: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding
Color: Not supported

Max modem speed

33.6 Kbps

Transmission speed

Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text data
scanned in Standard resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.

Scanning speed

Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) ADF: approx. 5
seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at fine fax resolution
mode)

Maximum document length

Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)

Paper size

Letter, A4, Legal

Resolution

Standard: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 100 dpi
Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 200 dpi
Super Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
200 dpi x 400 dpi
Ultra Fine: 16 pels/mm (406 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm (391 lines/inch)
400 dpi x 400 dpi

User Memory

2 MB

Halftone

256 levels

Specifications

305

306

Specifications

Maintaining Your Printer
25 Maintaining Your Printer .......................................................... 309
26 Clearing Jams............................................................................ 323

307

308

Maintaining Your Printer

Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality. If several people
are using the printer, you may want to designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems and
maintenance tasks to this key operator.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.

Determining the Status of Supplies
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can provide instant feedback
on remaining toner levels. Type the printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use
the E-Mail Alert feature that notifies you when the printer requires new supplies, type your name or the name of the
key operator in the e-mail list box.
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:
•

Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the printer can only display
information about one item at a time.)

•

Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge

Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner cartridge and paper.
Supply

Setting

Function

Toner cartridge

Toner Saving Mode in the Graphics This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less
tab of the printer driver
toner. When this feature is used, the image quality will be lower
than when it is not used.

Print media

Multiple Up in the Layout tab of
the printer driver

The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet. The
available numbers that each printer driver can print one sheet of
paper are as follows:
• Printer driver for Microsoft® Windows®: 2, 4, 8, or 16 pages
• Printer driver for Macintosh: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages
Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple Up allows you to
print up to 32 pages on one sheet of paper. (16 images on the front
and 16 on the back)

Storing Print Media
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do.
•

To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.

•

Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.

•

If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat surface so
the edges do not buckle or curl.

•

Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Maintaining Your Printer

309

Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:
•

Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).

•

An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.

•

Direct sunlight.

•

Dusty places.

•

A car for a long period of time.

•

An environment where corrosive gases are present.

•

An environment with salty air.

Replacing Toner Cartridges
WARNING: Before replacing toner cartridges, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important Information.
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more cartridges online at
http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" on page 360.
It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for
problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
WARNING: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could explode resulting in burns and injuries.
WARNING: Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner.

Removing the Toner Cartridges
1 Open the toner access cover.

310

Maintaining Your Printer

2 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

WARNING: Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.
3 Pull the toner cartridge out.

Maintaining Your Printer

311

Installing a Toner Cartridge
1 Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six times to distribute the toner evenly.

NOTE: Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the handle before replacing it.
NOTE: Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner.
2 Remove the tape from the toner cartridge.

3 Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of
the label until the cartridge clicks.

312

Maintaining Your Printer

4 Close the toner access cover.

Cleaning Inside the Printer
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
1 Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the toner access cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

313

2 Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.

3 Pull the toner cartridge out.

4 Pull the other three cartridges out as well.
5 Pull the cleaning rod out.

314

Maintaining Your Printer

6 Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer until its tip reaches the interior of the
printer as illustrated below, and then pull it out.

7 Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes.
8 Insert the cleaning rod back to its original location.

9 Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing
near the center of the label until the cartridge clicks.

Maintaining Your Printer

315

10 Replace the other three cartridges as well.
11 Close the toner access cover.

Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor
Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the Status Monitor or operator panel.
1 Ensure that the printer is turned off.
2 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

316

Maintaining Your Printer

3 Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.

4 Close the rear cover.

5 Turn on the printer.

Adjusting Color Registration
This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first install the printer or after moving it to a
new location.
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.

Performing Auto Adjust
Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically.
The Operator Panel

1 Press the

(Menu) button.

2 Press the

button until System is highlighted, and then press the

3 Press the

button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the

4 Press the

button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press the

5 Press the

button until Adjust ColorRegi is highlighted, and then press the

6 Ensure that Auto Adjust is highlighted, and then press the

(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.
(Set) button.

(Set) button.

Maintaining Your Printer

317

7 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the
button.

button to select Yes, and then press the

(Set)

Auto adjust is performed.
The Tool Box

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment.
5 Click Start next to Auto Correct.
The color registration is corrected automatically.

Printing the Color Registration Chart
The Tool Box

1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment.
5 Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed.

Determining Values
On the color registration chart printed, find the straightest lines where the two black lines and the colored line are
most closely aligned for each color (Y, M, and C).
If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-5 - +5) indicated by the straightest line for each color.
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color registration.
When the value is not 0, enter the value according to the procedure in "Entering Values" on page 319.

318

Maintaining Your Printer

Entering Values
The Tool Box

Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make adjustments.
1 Click Start → All Programs → Dell Printers → Dell C1765 Color Multifunction Printer → Tool Box.
NOTE: The Select Printer window appears in this step, when multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this
case, click Dell C1765nf Color Multifunction Printer or Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer listed in Printer Name, and
then click OK.
The Tool Box opens.
2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab.
3 Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.
The registration adjustment page is displayed.
4 Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment.
5 Select the value with the straight line, and then click Apply New Settings.
6 Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
7 Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest. If a line is not the straightest at 0, determine
the value and adjust the printer again.
CAUTION: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until the printer motor has stopped running.

Maintaining Your Printer

319

Cleaning the Scanner
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the scanner at the start
of each day and during the day, as needed.
1 Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the document cover.

3 Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and dry.
1
2
4

White Strip

White Document Cover

Document Glass

ADF Glass

320

Maintaining Your Printer

4 Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until they are clean and dry.

5 Close the document cover.

Maintaining Your Printer

321

Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller
Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is recommended to clean the ADF feed roller
at regular intervals.
1 Open the ADF cover.

2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.
If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly
dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the contamination
from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.

322

Maintaining Your Printer

Clearing Jams

Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams. See "Print Media
Guidelines" on page 203 for more information.
NOTE: The images used in this manual are those of the Dell™ C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer unless otherwise mentioned.
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.

Avoiding Jams
•

Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" on page 203 for more information.

•

See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 211 and "Loading Print Media in the
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 219 to load print media properly.

•

Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the stack print media height does not exceed the maximum
height indicated by the line with an arrow on each width guide.

•

Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.

•

Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding one sheet at a
time through the MPF or the PSI.

•

Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

•

Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.

•

Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media.

•

Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print Media" on
page 207.

•

Do not remove the PSI during a print job.

•

Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.

•

Overtightening the guides may cause jams.

Clearing Jams

323

Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
WARNING: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may permanently damage the printer.
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.

7
1

Scanner Unit

Fusing Unit

Levers

Rear Cover

ADF Cover

Front Cover

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

324

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF
When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the
following procedure.
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
WARNING: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during

use.

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1 Open the ADF cover.

2 Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the following
illustration.

Clearing Jams

325

3 If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder tray.

4 Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.

5 Close the document feeder tray.

326

Clearing Jams

6 Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.

NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-size document.
7 If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any jammed
document there, open the document output tray.

Clearing Jams

327

8 Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by carefully pulling the document in the direction
of the arrow shown in the following illustration.

328

Clearing Jams

Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1 Pull the PSI out.

2 Remove any jammed paper from the front of the printer.

Clearing Jams

329

3 Replace the PSI in the printer.

WARNING: When putting the PSI back into the printer, do not use excessive force. Doing so could damage the PSI or
the inside of the printer.

4 Press the

(Set) button.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
WARNING: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during

use.

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

330

Clearing Jams

2 Lift up the levers.

3 Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer.

4 Lower the levers to their original position.

Clearing Jams

331

5 Close the rear cover.

Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray
WARNING: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety instructions in the Important
Information.
WARNING: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet
before performing maintenance.
WARNING: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during

use.

NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the print media path.
1 Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.

332

Clearing Jams

2 Lift up the levers.

3 Remove any jammed paper from the back of the printer. If no paper is found in the paper path, face the front of
the printer and check the output tray.

4 Lift and open the scanner unit.

Clearing Jams

333

5 Remove any jammed paper out of the output tray.

6 Lower and close the scanner unit.

7 Lower the levers to their original position.

334

Clearing Jams

8 Close the rear cover.

Clearing Jams

335

336

Clearing Jams

Troubleshooting
27 Troubleshooting......................................................................... 339

337

338

Troubleshooting
Basic Printer Problems

Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your printer, check each of the following:
•

The power cable is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

•

The printer is turned on.

•

The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.

•

Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer. This often fixes the problem.
NOTE: If error messages are displayed on the operator panel or on your computer screen, follow the on-screen instructions to
resolve the printer problems. For details about error messages and error codes, see "Understanding Printer Messages" on
page 295.

Display Problems
Problem

Action

Menu settings changed from the operator
panel have no effect.

Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities have
precedence over the settings made on the operator panel.
Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the
software program instead of the operator panel.

Printing Problems
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case,
enter the password you specified, and press the
(Set) button.

Problem

Action

Job did not print or incorrect characters
printed.

Ensure that Ready appears on the operator panel before you send a job to print.
Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cable and that it is securely
connected to the printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
Check the interface of your printer from the Admin Menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a panel settings page to verify
that the current interface settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a Report/List
Using the Operator Panel" on page 175 for details on how to print a panel settings
page.

Troubleshooting

339

Problem

Action

Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds
occur.

Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.
See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 208 for more information.
Fan the print media before loading it.
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.
Ensure that the width and length guides are adjusted correctly.
Ensure that the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) is securely inserted.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the PSI or the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) when
you load it. Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
Ensure that the print media is not curled.
Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are
using. See "Loading Print Media" on page 211 for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding
improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print
media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.

The envelope is creased after printing.

Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in "Loading an Envelope in the
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 216 or "Loading an Envelope in the Priority
Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 221.

Page breaks in unexpected places.

Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer Settings menu in the
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.

Print media does not stack neatly in the
output tray.

Turn the print media stack over in the PSI and MPF.

Printer does not duplex pages.

Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the
Paper/Output tab in the printer driver.

340

Troubleshooting

Print Quality Problems
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163 and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 97.

The output is too light

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Verify that the Paper Type setting in the printer driver matches the print The task is complete.
media you loaded.
a On the Paper/Output tab in Printing Preferences of the printer
driver, check the Paper Type setting.
b Load dry (not damp) and corrected print media, and then click Print
Test Page in Printer properties of the printer driver.

Go to action 4.

Disable the Toner Saving Mode in the printer driver.
a On the Graphics tab in Printing Preferences of the printer driver,
ensure that the Toner Saving Mode check box is not selected.

The toner cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the
amount of toner in each toner cartridge.
a Check the toner level in the Status tab in the Status Monitor.
b Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Is the problem recovered?

Verify that the print media is not damp and the correct print media is
used. See "Supported Paper Types" on page 209. If not, use the print
media recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?

Is the problem recovered?
The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

341

Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

The print media surface may be uneven. Try changing the Paper Type
setting in the printer driver. For example, change the plain paper to
thick.
a On the Paper/Output tab in Printing Preferences of the printer
driver, change the Paper Type setting.
Is the problem recovered?

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper
Types" on page 209. If not, use the print media recommended for the
printer.
Is the problem recovered?

Adjust the fusing unit temperature.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
b Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your
printing media.
c Click Apply New Settings.
d Click close box to exit Tool Box.
Is the problem recovered?

342

Troubleshooting

Random spots/Blurred images

Action

Yes

Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed correctly. See "Installing a
Toner Cartridge" on page 312.

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges, install Dell brand toner
cartridges.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Is the problem recovered?

Is the problem recovered?
3

The task is complete.
Clean up the fusing unit.
a Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then print a solid image all
over paper.
b Load the printed sheet with the side to be printed on facing down,
and then print a blank sheet of paper.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

The entire output is blank

If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.

Streaks appear on the output

If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.

Troubleshooting

343

Pitched color dots

If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.

Vertical blanks

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Clean inside the printer and performing test print.
a Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning rod. See "Cleaning
Inside the Printer" on page 313.
b Click Print Test Page in Printer properties of the printer driver.
Is the problem recovered?

Mottle

Adjust the transfer bias.
a Launch the Tool Box, click Adjust Transfer Roller on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
b Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used.
Is the problem recovered?

If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media
recommended for the printer.
Is the problem recovered?

344

Troubleshooting

Ghosting

Action
1

Yes

The task is complete.
Adjust the transfer bias.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
b Click Ghost Configuration Chart.
The ghost configuration chart is printed.
c Launch the Tool Box, and click Transfer Roller Refresh Mode on the
Printer Maintenance tab.
d Check the check box next to On, and then click Apply New Settings.
e Click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.
f Click Ghost Configuration Chart.

No
Go to action 2.

The ghost configuration chart is printed.
Is the problem recovered?
2

If you use non-recommended print media, use the print media
recommended for the printer.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

345

Fog

Action

Yes

Is the whole page printed light?

Contact Dell.

Go to action 2.

Start Clean Developer.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis
tab.
b Click Start.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Yes

Is the problem recovered?

Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)

Action
1

If the printer is installed in a high altitude location, set the altitude of The task is complete.
the location.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Altitude on the Printer
Maintenance tab.
b Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer
is installed.
Is the problem recovered?

346

Troubleshooting

Contact Dell.

Auger mark

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Yes

Start Clean Developer.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis
tab.
b Click Start.
Is the problem recovered?

Wrinkled/Stained paper

Action
1

Verify that the correct print media is being used. See "Supported Paper The task is complete.
Sizes" on page 208 and "Print Media Guidelines" on page 203. If not, use
the print media recommended for the printer.

If printing on an
envelope, go to action
2.

Is the problem recovered?

If printing on print
media other than
envelopes, contact Dell.

Check the crease. Is the crease within 30 mm of the four edges of the
envelope?

This type of crease is
considered normal.
Your printer is not at
fault.

If the envelope is 220
mm or longer (C5 or
Envelope #10), go to
action 3a.
If the envelope is
shorter than 220 mm
(Monarch or DL), go to
action 3b.

Troubleshooting

347

Action

Yes

The envelope is
Envelope #10.

The envelope is C5.

Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge?

Go to action 4b.
3b

Load the envelope long edge feed in the MPF with the flap open and
facing up. For details, see "When Loading Envelope #10, DL, or
Monarch" on page 216.

Go to action 4a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4b.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Yes

Is the problem recovered?
4a

Load the envelope in the MPF with the flap open and facing up. For
details, see "When Loading C5" on page 217.
Is the problem recovered?

Use a different size envelope.
Is the problem recovered?

The top margins is incorrect

Action
1

Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used. The task is complete.
Is the problem recovered?

348

Troubleshooting

Contact Dell.

Color registration is out of alignment

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3.

Execute auto color registration adjustment.
a Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration Adjustment on the
Printer Maintenance tab.
b Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment.
c Click Start next to Auto Correct.
Is the problem recovered?

Clean the CTD sensor.
a Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density
(CTD) Sensor" on page 316.
b Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration Adjustment on the
Printer Maintenance tab.
c Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment.
d Click Start next to Auto Correct.
Is the problem recovered?

Print the color registration chart and manually correct the color
The task is complete.
registration.
a Click Registration Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.
b Clear the On check box for Auto Registration Adjustment.
c Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart.
The color registration chart is printed.
d Select the value with the straight line. See "Adjusting Color
Registration" on page 317 for details.
e Click Apply New Settings.
f Click Start next to Print Color Regi Chart to print the color
registration chart again.
g Adjust the values for every color until the lines at 0 are the straightest.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

349

Protrudent / Bumpy paper

Action
1

Yes

No
Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?

Jam
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be performed using the operator panel or
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool,
see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 163 and "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool" on page 97.

Misfeed jam
Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Proceed to the action
corresponding to the
type of the print media
being used:

Remove the paper from the PSI, and then ensure that papers are
properly inserted on the MPF.
Is the problem recovered?

• Thick - 2a
• Thin - 2b
• Envelope - 2c
If performing manual
duplex printing, go to
action 2d.
If using paper other
than the above or if not
performing duplex
printing, go to action
2e.
2a

Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

Is the problem recovered?
2b

Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.
Is the problem recovered?

350

Troubleshooting

Action
2c

Yes

Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in the MPF as instructed in The task is complete.
"Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 216.

No
Go to action 3b.

Is the problem recovered?
2d

Ensure that the print media is not curled.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

Is the print media damp?

Go to action 3c.

Go to action 3a.

Fan the print media.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3c.

Is the problem recovered?

If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use another envelope.

Turn over the print media.

If you are performing
manual duplex printing
or if using an envelope,
contact Dell.
The task is complete.

Go to action 3a.

The task is complete.

Go to action 4.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Go to action 2.

Is the problem recovered?
Is the problem recovered?
4

Use print media that is not damp.
Is the problem recovered?

Multi-feed jam

Remove the paper from the PSI, and then ensure that papers are
inserted properly in the MPF.
Is the problem recovered?

Is the print media damp?

Go to action 3a.

Go to action 3b.

Use print media that is not damp.

The task is complete.

Go to action 3b.

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Is the problem recovered?
3b

Fan the print media.
Is the problem recovered?

A document jam occurs in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) if scanning of multiple-sheet document is
cancelled while scanning is in progress.

Action

Yes

The task is complete.

Contact Dell.

Clear the jam. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF" on page 325.
Is the problem recovered?

Troubleshooting

351

Copy Problem
Problem

Action

A document loaded in the ADF cannot be
copied.

Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.

Fax Problems
Problem

Action

The printer is not working, there is no
display and the buttons are not working.

Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

No dial tone sounds.

Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone
Line" on page 43.

Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.

Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored in the memory do not
dial correctly.

Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly.

The document does not feed into the
printer.

Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly.
Check that the document is of the right size, not too thick or thin.

Print a Address Book list.

Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically.

The FAX mode should be selected.
Ensure that there is paper in the PSI or MPF.
Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.
Check the Junk Fax Setup setting.

The printer does not send faxes.

Sending should show up on the display.
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.

The incoming fax has blank spaces or is
received in poor-quality.

The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your printer by making a copy.
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner cartridge. For details, see
"Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 310.

Some of the words on an incoming fax are
stretched.

The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam.

There are lines on the documents you send. Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See "Cleaning the Scanner" on
page 320.
The printer dials a number, but the
connection with another fax machine fails.

The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming
calls. Speak with the other machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the
problem.

Documents are not stored in the memory.

There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the display shows a
Memory Full message, delete any documents you no longer need from the
memory and then restore the document, or wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax
transmission or reception) to complete.

352

Troubleshooting

Problem

Action

Blank areas appear at the bottom of each
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. See
page or on other pages, with a small strip of "Print Media Guidelines" on page 203.
text at the top.
The printer will not send or receive faxes.

Ensure that the country code is set correctly under
(Menu) → System
→Admin Menu → Fax Settings → Country.
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone
Line" on page 43.

An error often occurs during a fax
transmission or reception.

Reduce the modem speed under
(Menu) → System → Admin Menu →
Fax Settings → Modem Speed.

Scanning Problems
Problem

Action

The scanner does not work.

Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down from the document
glass, or face up in the ADF.
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to
scan. Try the preview function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan resolution
rate.
Check that the Ethernet or USB cable is connected properly.
Ensure that the Ethernet or USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable with a
known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the application you want to
use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.

The printer scans very slowly.

Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E-mail or Scan
to Network feature.
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of
memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image.
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low
resolution.

Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the specifications for the printer. See
in the ADF.
"Supported Paper Types" on page 209 for more information.
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF.
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly.
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity
of the ADF.
Ensure that the document is not curled.
Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.
Vertical stripes appear on the output when
scanned using the ADF.

Clean the ADF glass.
See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 320.

A smear appears at the same location on the Clean the document glass.
output when scanned using the document See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 320.
glass.
Images are skewed.

Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass.

Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from the document glass.
using the ADF.

Troubleshooting

353

Problem

Action

The printer does not properly transfer scan
data to a specified destination via the Scan
to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.

Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Scan to Network
Check the following settings under Address Book → Server Address:
• Server Address
• Share Name
• Server Path
• Login Name
• Login Password
Scan to E-mail
Check the following setting under Address Book → Fax/E-Mail:
• E-Mail Address

Cannot scan using Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) on a Microsoft®
Windows Server® 2003 computer.

Enable WIA on the computer.

Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server
2008 R2 computer.

Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.

Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2012 computer.

Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.

To enable WIA:
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Services.
2 Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and then click Start.
To install Desktop Experience:
1 Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click Server Manager.
2 Under Features Summary, click Add Features.
3 Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next, and then click Install.
4 Restart the computer.
To install Desktop Experience:
1 Click Server Manager from the Start screen.
The Server Manager screen appears.
2 Under Manage, click Add Roles and Features.
Add Roles and Features Wizard appears.
3 Click Next to skip the Before you begin page.
4 Ensure that Role-based or feature-based installation is selected, and then click

Next.

5 Ensure that Select a server from the server pool is selected, select the server under

Server Pool, and then click Next.

6 Click Next to skip the Select server roles page.
7 Select the Desktop Experience check box under User Interfaces and

Infrastructure, and then click Next.

8 Click Confirmation from the list on the left.
9 Select the Restart the destination server automatically if required check box, and

then click Install.
10 Restart the computer.

354

Troubleshooting

Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems
Problem

Action

Unable to retrieve the Address Book data
from the printer on the Address Book
Editor.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the
Ethernet or USB cable.
Ensure that the printer’s power is on.
Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your computer.
(The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the printer driver.)

The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the
printer.

Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the
Ethernet or USB cable.
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power
switch off and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.

The scanner driver has not been registered
on your computer and cannot be accessed
from ScanButton Manager.

Install the scanner driver. If the driver is installed, uninstall it and then reinstall it.

Failed to scan your document on the printer Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB
via ScanButton Manager.
cable.
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on, reboot it by turning the power
switch off and then on again.
If a scan application is running, close the application once, restart the application,
and then try scanning again.
Failed to create an image file via
ScanButton Manager.

Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk.
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.

Failed to initialize ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.

Failed to execute ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.

An unexpected error occurred on
ScanButton Manager.

Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and then reinstall it.

Troubleshooting

355

Wireless Problems (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction Printer only)
Problem

Action

Cannot setup wireless connection.

Ensure that the Ethernet and USB cable are disconnected from the printer.
Ensure that Wi-Fi is set to On. See "Wi-Fi (Dell C1765nfw Color Multifunction
Printer only)" on page 180.
Try disabling the firewall on your computer. The firewall on your computer may be
blocking communication with your printer.

Cannot setup wireless connection with WPS Ensure that the security setting of the wireless LAN access point or router is WPA
or WPA2. (WEP is not supported on WPS.)
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup®).
Cannot setup wireless connection with the
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push
Button Configuration).

Press the WPS button on the wireless LAN access point or router within 2 minutes
after starting the WPS operation on the printer. For details about the wireless LAN
access point or router, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access
point or router.

Cannot setup wireless connection with
Check if the PIN you have entered on the computer is correct.
WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal
Identification Number).

Dell C1765Nfw Mfp Laser Printer Users Manual User's Guide

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation